You are on page 1of 295

Presto Manual 2015

New features Presto 2015.01

Using Presto

Use interface

Fields
Windows
Editing items
Layouts
Filter elements
Text windows

Presto in the design stage

7
8
10
15
22
24

27

Estimate
Stages and activities
Integration to BIM
Take-off lines: CAD drawing
An information system

27
50
69
70
75

Presto in the planning stage

95

Economic planning
Financial planning
Temporary planning
Primavera and Project link

95
105
108
119

Presto in project management

123

Tender bid for complete work


The certification
Cost tracking

123
124
130

Presto for construction company

135

Procurement and subcontracting


Production
Invoices
Centralized invoicing
Analysis of costs and expenses

135
148
150
162
165

Menus and options


FILE
EDITION
VIEW
REFERENCE
TOOLS
PROCCESS
PLUGINS
CALCULATIONS
REPORTS
WINDOW
HELP

Tutorial of estimates
1 Creation of concepts
2 Take-off lines

175
175
189
190
221
222
223
224
224
225
229
229

233
233
239

3 Completion estimate
4 Printing and connection with other programs
5 Certifications

Cost tutorial
1 Estimate of estimated cost
2 Purchases
3 Invoices
4 Orders and deliveries
5 Calculation of actual costs

Design report
File
VER
TOOLS
SECTION

242
244
246

249
249
251
257
261
263

267
268
269
278
280

Expression builder

283

Link to Excel and Access

287

Excel
Access

Appendix I. Technical documentation


Directories and files
User restrictions

287
288

291
291
292

New features Presto 2015.01


The manual includes the novelties of the new version.
Filters
When you activate a filter by differences header are highlighted.
It displays numerical ranges in filters by content or differences.
Temporary measures
Window simple and easy to use.

It detects take-off lines that may have been removed from the
reference.

New option to assign work items per family and type of work
items.
Copy for Revit contextual option.

Take-off lines and activities


New options to reorder activities.

Improvements consolidation options take-off lines.

Access columns for the Activities table.

User parameters
The windows of keywords let to visualize data related to
groups of parameters and measurement units.

Easy to create custom user settings or add the existing ones.

When you delete a variable, the keywords or parameters of


the same name are removed.

Measurements in XCA format


New option FILE: Import to create works with their corresponding take-off lines from this format.
Temporary planning
Improvements in the calculation and representation of tasks
with breakage.

New fields of cumulative percentages and ALAP dates.

Cost control
Improvements that facilitate the management of supplies consumed by target.

New features Presto 2015.01 1

Control of users with network licenses


It allows each user to the required modules. It requires be previously identified.
Tracking changes by user in shared projects
Generation of files of activity by works with the most important actions performed by each user.
Content and examples
Bars reports adapted to current types of tasks and currency
management.

The project Estimate replaces Example of BIM and Estimate and measurements.

New project of example rac_advanced_sample_project CostIt-generated.

Template of works, Grille analytique dtaille - UNTEC.

2 Manual de Presto manual

Using Presto
In addition to this manual, there are other resources for learning to
use Presto in www.presto.es, section Using Presto.
Training
Know the official centers and certified trainers Presto, attend our
webinars or hire our online courses and customized.
Support
See doubts concerning the latest version free e-mail and from the
HELP: Send inquiry to Presto or hire our personalized service.
Technical notes
Find detailed processes, ideas and examples of using Presto.
Technical questions
Solve the most frequent questions on the use and installation of Presto made by users. You can also access from Presto in the FAQ: Frequently asked menu.
Books about Presto
Discover and request publications available.

Using Presto 3

4 Manual de Presto manual

Use interface

Presto windows.
Presto uses the Windows usual criteria to manage windows, menus
and options.
Frames and main windows
The information of the options of the menu VIEW as Estimate or
Gantt Chart , is displayed in main windows, which appear as tabs
within a common framework.
A frame may be split by dragging a tab to the edge of the initial
frame. The frames are all horizontal or vertical and always completely
fill the main window Presto, without overlaps or gaps. You can move
tabs between different frameworks and adjust the width or height of
each frame.
The options in the WINDOW menu open predefined combinations
of main windows, targeting the most common processes of Presto,
which can be modified by adding or removing windows.

Use interface 5

Subordinate windows
Each main window in turn may have subordinate windows, like Takeoff lines or Text, which appear as tabs within a subordinate frame.
These subordinate tabs can be dragged to alter your choice, either
floating or within its framework.
Other windows
The CAD and Design report options open separate windows in the
overview window.
The options Working environment and Project settings open dialog boxes.
Access to options
Each option icon and column header has a clue, or brief help text that
is displayed when the cursor.
The toolbar offers contextual options to choose the bars to include in
the main window.
The options accessible through menus with the left mouse button,
indicated by listing the succession of options, starting with the main
menu, which is written in capital letters:
FILE: New: Path
It refers to the Path box on the New from the FILE menu. When
several followed the same menu options, only the last is indicated.
Options accessible via context menus
It appears with the mouse right button, and depend on the location
of the cursor:

At the head of a column, applied to the entire column, such as


Hide column.

On a table field or the central area of a window, apply the


countryside or the entire row, such as colour filters.

<option name>
Shape that indicated in the manual the contextual options.
Function keys or accelerators
[Shift + F7]
The key or key combination in brackets, separated by + is indicated.
The combinations are to be pressed simultaneously.

6 Manual de Presto manual

Fields
Most estimate data is stored in tables containing similar data sets.
Each element of a table has a set of fields with a fixed meaning, as the
code or price.
The list of all tables with all possible fields, you can see in the dialog
box and expressions builder in the Field List option from the
REPORTS: Design reports window.
The track that appears when the cursor is on the top of each field displays a descriptive summary.
Each field is identified by a name that should be added as a prefix the
table name as it should be used in expressions and reports. The repetitions of the same table are ignored.
For example, the code of a concept is identified as:
Concepts.Code
Editing fields
The editable fields can be modified to slow double click or [F2].
You can also copy the values from the next fields:
Copy the field above or [F9]
It copies the contents of the top field in the active field or in the selected range of fields.
Copy field left or [Shift + F9]
Copy the contents of the field to the left of the active field.
Autofill fields
Many fields are automatically filled with the appropriate values to
each field, such as provinces, suppliers, measurement units, or prices.
Refer to Suggest or [F7].
Fields lists
Values not modifiable by the user, such as categories or forms of
payment for maturities.
Date fields
It displays a calendar to select a date. You can manually change, and if
not completed, and the appropriate values are added.

Use interface 7

Suggest
The button to the right of the active field proposes a list of useful
values to fill by clicking on chosen value, or other information concerning the same.
Field
Price
Code
Code2
Summary
City
Quantity
Unit
Duration

Suggestion
Prices adjusted to inflation or geographical areas
Automatic codes for new concepts
Decimal coding of the concept
Conversion case sensitive
City or town corresponding to the zip code
Inverse of the quantity or performance
Standardized units of measure
Estimation by costs and returns

The first suggested value is the current value of the field.


The list will automatically filtering if a character is typed. This list can
be sorted by any column by clicking the right mouse button in the
header.
If a column or selected range, there are two types of suggests:
Fixed, which is filled exactly the same value in all selected
fields.

Calculated, in which each field takes on a different value, such


as Convert to uppercase. They identify with the magenta
colour.

Suggest or [F7]
Equivalent to press the button, but after accepting the value, is
passed to the next field, so that you can hold on to fill several fields
simultaneously.
[Shift + F7]
Similar to the previous option, but going to the inferior field.

Windows
All Presto windows, except text ones and graphics, displays information of tables.
To move in these windows, in addition to the standard options of
Windows, you can use the following keys and combinations:
8 Manual de Presto manual

Action
[Intro] (numeric keyboard)
[Begin]
[End]
[Ctrl] + [Ini]
[Ctrl] + [End]
Previous
Next
First element
Last element

Effect
It acts as the [Tab] key of the main keyboard.
It goes to the first field of the row.
It goes to the last field of the row.
It goes to the first field and element of the
table.
It goes to the last element of the table.
Move to the previous and next item in the table
It goes to the first and last element.

Quick fill
The Last element option moves to the last element of the table faster than in the normal filling, but not is allowed to work in other windows at once. You can return to normal mode pressing Cancel.
Specific Resources of the Estimates window
Action
Double-click in the header
Icon Up
Double clicking in a concept
Previous
Next
First element
Last element
Double click on the concept
Route in the header

Icon Go to concept

Effect on Estimate window


Upgrade to superior concept.
Go down to the lower concepts.
They goes same level concepts without up
and down on successively.
They move to the first or last item of the
same level.
Go down to the lower concepts.
Path from the root concept to the active concept, which allows access to any of the parent
concepts, as well as the previous and the next
level.
It positions in the selected concept.

Double click on fields of document windows


This action can open other windows on the pulsed field.
Use interface 9

Go to concept
It let searching for concepts from the full codes or initials. The list of
concepts to choose progressively is reduced as being written mask
concept.
Hierarchical windows
The windows Tree, Dairy and Gantt chart are hierarchical.
Hierarchical windows have a similar behaviour than table windows,
but do not support filters and always have all the information that
corresponds to the selection from the dropdown list.
You can choose the visible levels with the drop-down list showing the
hierarchy levels, or with the symbols [+] and [-] to the left of each
concept; whether to display the list there are items selected, only
open the levels corresponding to those elements.
Double-clicking on any field opens or closes the level.

Editing items
Add elements
To insert elements, some tables require first filling required fields,
such as code or document concept.
Action
Add a line at the end
Collate a line
Drag and drop

Procedure
[Enter] or cursor down from the last line.
Insert line or [Insert].
You can do this from another window of the
same project or from another project; the cursor
takes a rectangular shape.

Selection of elements
Most actions on the elements of a table can be applied to all elements or a selection.
You can select:
Selection
Lines
Columns
All

Clicking and dragging on


Numerical box to the left.
Column header.
Left upper corner.
Equivalent to Select All and [Ctrl + E].
Is cancelled by pressing again on the top left corner.

10 Manual de Presto manual

Ranges

A cell or a rectangular group of contiguous cells.

To check and uncheck groups of rows or columns, use the [Ctrl] or


[Shift] keys, with the usual criteria in Windows. To deselect, click any
cell outside the range selected.
Context menu Options
Copy | Paste
It inserts into the active table the information in the clipboard.
If the information has been copied from an equivalent table in the
same or other project, is inserted on a new line at the cursor position.
If the information comes from another program such as a spreadsheet or a Word table, or Presto, but the source and destination tables are not compatibles, the fields are pasted from the field where
the cursor is, as if the data were typed manually.
Hidden fields and inactive and the information is not supported, as
the text in a numeric field are ignored. Line breaks of the clipboard
contents generate a new line and tabs change of column.
When something is copied to the clipboard from another program has
priority it copied from Presto previously. To avoid this, deselect.
Cut
Delete the text of a field and copy it to the clipboard.
Delete
Select the desired line and press [Delete]. It removes the selected element and all associated information.

If you eliminate a concept of the last decomposition where is,


it also eliminates the concept.

You cannot delete elements that have associated information


affecting cost control, as concepts with supplies or suppliers
with documents.

To eliminate
Complete tables
All texts
Associated files
Stages

Option
Project settings: Tables, selecting the tables
and deleting.
TOOLS: Working with Text, Delete option.
VIEW: Files, select the files and delete.
VIEW: Activities and certifications and clear the
fields with quantities.
Use interface 11

To eliminate
Stages and activities
Temporary planning

Option
VIEW: Take-off lines, select the take-off lines
and delete.
Remove all precedencies.

Duplicate
Create an identical concept but with a different code, which includes
most of the information associated with the original, as the quantity
and measurement lines, text and associated files.
This option appears in the Code windows budget, concepts, activities, organizations, and management systems field.
Rename a concept
When you type or paste a non-existing code in the code of a concept,
the concept is renamed.
If the code already exists, the concept is replaced by the new, keeping
the information associated with the above concept, as the quantities.
Except in supplies windows, where the code change represents a
change of provided concept.
Undo | Redo
These options, accessible from the EDITION menu or its icon, allow
unlimited editing work done.
Undo
It cancels the operations performed by the user, in reverse order.
It ignores the actions that only affect the interface, such as open or
close windows or work environment, or undo the actions of other
users working on the same project.
The text windows have undo and redo specific options.
Redo
Cancels the effect of immediately preceding undo operations.
Special undo
It displays the list of actions that can be undone or redone, with the
number of operations in each transaction, time, date and current price
of the estimate.
Double clicking on a line undo or redo all operations until it once.
12 Manual de Presto manual

Activate
The undo option can be disabled to speed up the work, for example,
to perform time-consuming operations.
If during the saving process of a project, Cancel is pressed on the
part that keeps undo actions, this option is disabled.
Create snapshot
Enter a line in a list of undo to which you can easily return.
Copy
It copies the actions list to the clipboard for combining the different
users and control or audit the operations.
Mask selection | Mask unselection
On a column header, select rows based on the contents of the selected column.
Non selected items are still visible, unlike the filter options that eliminate temporarily window elements that do not match the conditions.
Reorder elements
In many windows exists global ordering options.
In Estimate and TakeOff windows and in subordinate Supplies
you can sort an element by dragging it to its new position within the
same window.
The Display order dropdown list in the header indicates the display
order of the tables that have more than one key field, as the Invoices window.
Sort ascending | Sort descending
On a column header, order permanently the column elements.
These options are activated in some columns in tables of concepts,
Relationships or Measurements.
Ascendant sorting on screen | Descending sorting in screen
They have the same effect as the previous, but it is temporary.
Up | Down
Move the concept before or after the concept adjacent in the list. In
the Activities window, change the Number field.

Use interface 13

Increase level | Demote


First you have to physically be at the computer where the authorization system to be activated is installed. From this computer, go to
Presto Activation Manager to generate the activation file by following this procedure:
Move [F4]
It inserts in the cursor position concepts or take-off lines copied to
the clipboard and removes it from its previous position.
If there is nothing on the clipboard, Presto requests a mask, inserting
in the cursor position all the concepts that match and eliminating
from its previous position concepts that have only one superior.
It is only enabled in Estimate and Take-off lines windows.
Operate
It applies a predefined operations to a column or to a single column
range.
Refer to Expression builder.
In operations that appears in the first line of the dialog box is enough
to enter the desired factor and press Apply and Accept.
In the alphanumeric fields, in addition to match them to a content,
you can apply the sum, which adds a text to the end, and the subtraction, which removes a text from position where you are.
The generated result must be compatible with the field type and:
While operating on calculated quantities, the elements from
dependent are eliminated, as take-off lines or stages.

The concepts of percentage-type or not editable are not operated.

Operating on calculated prices, the program asks if you want


to block the price or remove the decomposition.

Replace
This option searches a text and replaces it with the one.
See what displayed on Search.
Find
Search for text in columns or selected range of cells, or column where
the cursor is.
14 Manual de Presto manual

The option is disabled if there is a selected column whose content is a


graphic, as if nature or information fields.
Characteristics
To search in numeric or date fields, the value to find you have
to write in its format, i.e., with decimal separator, thousand
separator and date separator.
The wildcard * at the end of each word is assumed. With the
text door also searches for the text doors.

With the prefix + only elements with that word are looked
for.

With - prefix, items with this word are avoided.

The text to search can include the special characters:


Character
^p
^t
^0nnn

Meaning
Paragraph break
Tab
Any character, given by its ASCII code with three digits

The search text can be separated from surrounding text by blank


spaces, punctuation, tabs and carriage returns.
Search in all texts in the active window
If the cursor is in a subordinate window of text and this option is enabled, also searches in the text of the concepts or documents visible in
the main window.

Layouts
The table windows layouts are selected using the dropdown list to the
left, and represent different ways of displaying the information in the
table, including:

The combination of visible and protected columns.

The filter or mask applied to the elements of the table.

The display order, if the window allows.

Customizing layouts
Layouts have options that allow you to customize the displayed information and adapt to the customs of each user or organization, or
adapted according to the geographical area where they are used.

Use interface 15

These options let you set the default content of the layouts, and sharing the definition between different users.
Table windows have several layouts of user for each user design it
according to their preferences.
Save default schema
Once selected columns visible, protected or not, user columns and
format multiple fields if they are available, and the filter expression
used, this option saves the settings as standard schema or schema
default.
By using Restore layout option, it recovers the corresponding saved
definition.
Schema export
It generates a file with .PrestoLayout extension, which contains the
definition of the active layout. The file name is formed with the window name plus the name of the exported layout, and is in XML format.
Retrieve original schema
It replaces the default layout by the program original layout.
EDITION: Restore layout
Changes made by the user in each layout, except filters, remain until
this option is used, which recovers the default layout that be defined
at the time.
Global Options layouts
In the FILE menu there are options to export and import files containing layouts definitions.
Import: Layout definition
It imports a layouts definition file generated before, and replaces the
contents of the same exported layout, not on the layout where is imported.
If desired, the definition can be saved as a default layout.
Export: Default layouts
It generates a layouts definition file for each of the layouts of all program windows.

16 Manual de Presto manual

Uploading configuration files of default layouts


1. Initialization
When starting Presto, takes the default configuration, and performs a
sequential search of configuration files that can exist in different directories.
If you find these files in any of the steps, the process terminates, and
otherwise continue to the next step.
2. User files, in the configuration directory
(PrestoNNN.PrestoLayout)
The first time you boot Presto does not exist, and is created with the
original values once Presto closes.
On several occasions it boots Presto, it looks for this file.
If it exists, the default layout definitions are updated.
3. Administrator file, in the application directory
(Presto.PrestoLayout)
If it exists, the default layout definitions are updated.
4. Location file in the Data directory of each location
(Presto.PrestoLayout)
If it exists, the default layout definitions are updated.
Columns
The head of the numeric columns in a table may contain two types of
values:

The same value of the column, for the concept header.


The sum of the column values, in brackets.

The track on the column header shows the table to which the field
belongs, as should be used in expressions or user reports as Concepts.Description.
Fit column width
This option appears in the EDITION menu, enable automatic adjustment of column width to its content.
You can set a column width to another by clicking on the vertical line
separating the header of the column at the right. When setting a column automatic setting is disabled.

Use interface 17

Freeze column | Mobilize column


It prevents the columns on the left of the window disappear when the
other columns move to the left.
Protect column | Unprotect column
Fields of a protected column, which appears in the softer colour than
non-editable columns, can be edited if unprotected.
Choose visible columns
It lets modify the combination of visible columns, by a dialog box that
shows the possible columns and selected.
To move columns from one side to another you can use the arrow or
double-click on its name. The Up and Down buttons change the
position of the column.
In all layouts its possible choose several user columns that appears at
the end of the list of possible columns, and their properties are edited with contextual Edit user column option on the column header.
User columns
The schemes have up to 16 columns that you can customize with expressions of Presto, using the appropriate options that are in the context menu of the column header.
The process can be performed by one of the following modes:

Inserting a user column via Choose visible columns, then editing its content using Edit user column.
In one step, using the Insert Column user option.

Insert user column


It lets inserting a column with the user-defined content. The column is
inserted immediately before the column where this option is pressed.
It opens the Expression builder dialog, where the user can select one
of the existing in Fields and expressions or create a new one.
Edit user column
It lets modify the content and format of the user columns. It activates
only over the column where the right mouse button is pressed, and
allows you to set the following properties:
Property

Description

18 Manual de Presto manual

Suggest

Property
Name

Origin

Help
Format

Text colour
Background
colour

Description
Suggest
Unique name that identifies the List with the names of
expression.
the fields and available
expressions.
Expression of Presto.
Expression builder, with
fields and expressions
available.
Descriptive text of the expression that appears as track.
Appearance as the data type. Automatic
Numeric
Date
Alphanumeric
Text colour for the field.
Palette.
Background colour for the field. Palette.

The properties of a user column are the same regardless of where the
layout is used, and are different for each user and profile.
Name
Besides the names provided by the Suggest button, the user can
directly enter the name he want to assign to the expression, showing
a warning if it already exists in the list of fields and expressions.
Origin
Pressing the Suggest button, the available fields and expressions
appear, and if any of the expressions used in a user column, layouts
where it is are displayed.
You can also create new expressions. Refer to Expression builder:
Fields and expressions.
Format
The properties are similar to those described for the text boxes of
reports on Design report: VIEW: Properties.
The differences are:
Type: Automatic
If the result of the expression is:

Number: it applies the usual format for numeric fields.

Text: left justified.


Use interface 19

Type: Numeric
Header
It lets choosing the behaviour of the second line of the user column
header:

Default, try to execute the same expression for the superior


element, if any, and the estimate windows. It does not display
values in hierarchical or list windows.
Sum shows the result of adding the contents of the visible
cells of the column.

Remove or create a field or expression


These operations are performed from the Expressions builder. When
you select the Fields and expressions element on the left frame, the
names of the predefined or user- created expressions appears.
Delete
To delete an expression, you must hide the column where it is being
used in all layouts. If the expression is in use in some layout, this option is disabled and displays the name of the layout where is.
Save as
It let saving a new expression with the name indicated by the user,
which facilitates its identification in the list of Fields and expressions
and in the layouts columns.
Columns multiple fields
These fields appear in the layouts that shows scheduled information
for each concept, such as quantities or amounts by stages or activities, contracts suppliers, or entities of comparison of prices.
Are chosen in different form to other columns, and placed to the right
of the layouts.
Columns of information fields: Info
Indicate the types of information items in the table.
Field
Ia

Icon

It has
Associated files

Windows
Documents Concepts Diary

Id

Vector drawings

Concepts Diary

Ie

Price. Not in Info

Concepts

Ig

It is supplier in any document Concepts

20 Manual de Presto manual

Field
Ig

Icon

It has
Documents

Windows
Diary

Ih

Keywords. Not in Info

Concepts

Ii

Images

Concepts Diary

Ij

It is a supply in any document Concepts

Il

Precedencies

Relations

Im

Take-off lines

Relations

Ip

Specifications

Concepts Diary

Iq

Records

Diary

Ir

Inferior concepts

Concepts

Ir

Resources

Diary

Is

Over one superior

Concepts

It

Text

Documents Concepts Diary

Iu

Stages

Relations

Iv

Maturities

Documents, Diary

Inferior and more than one


superior. Only in the Info
field
Documents equals Orders, Deliveries, Invoices

Concepts

Some icons such as Texts, appear with grey background colour


when the information is in one of their inferiors, bottomless when the
information belongs to the active concept, and half grey when the
two situations.
For this information as text using the field indicated on the left, preceded by the character % and the name of the table. In the result,
the letter refers to the concept and the upper to the lower.
For example the expression which indicates the existence of associated files in a concept is:
% Concepts.Ia
If the result is aA, both the concept and inferiors have associated
files.
Concepts.Info
Indicates the types of information associated with the concept.
Use interface 21

Filter elements
The visible elements in a table can be chosen by different types of
masks and filters, which are chosen in the icon bar at the headwaters
of the columns or the context menu on the fields.
It can be activated a filter of each type, shown at the top of the window and whose effects are accumulated.
Unlike selection options, filters temporarily remove from visualization
the elements that do not match the condition.
In key fields
Mask
The masks are chosen in the Mask dropdown list and support the
wildcards ? and *.
It applies only to the table key fields, usually the codes. If multiple key
fields, such as documents windows, is applied to the selected field for
sorting it.
In other fields
Filter by content
It displays the lines with the same contents as the field on which the
option, except in numeric fields, showing the values within the range [
| 0 to 1 | 1 to 10 | 10 to 100 | 100 to 1000 | ].Negative numbers
are grouped into a single range.
If a range of fields or rows are selected, items containing any of the
values of the selection are displayed.
Filter by text colour | background
Displays lines with the same text colour or background in that field.
Joined filters
Add filter by content
Collect any active filter then filter by content.
In columns
The columns in which a filter for differences there on, show a header
colour different from other columns.
Filter by differences
Removes display items whose value is duplicated, except for numeric
columns, hiding the all range values minus one.

22 Manual de Presto manual

When placing the cursor on the filter field, a track shows the number
of hidden items with the same value as the field. After filtration column, can add a filter that collects content from before.
Add filter by differences
After filtration column, add a filter for differences that accumulates
the previous filter.
Filter builder
Filter by expression
Show items that meet the condition or result of an expression of Presto.
It displays the dialog box of the expressions builder, with a quick help
to define comparison filters between a field and a value:
Field
It let choosing the field on which the filter will act in a list of fields
in the active window.
Operator
List the most common comparison operators.
Value
Field value to compare.
Clicking Apply is generated the necessary expression, that definitely
applies pressing Accept.
You can modify this expression, create other expressions or combine
multiple filters following the rules described in Expressions builder.
If mark Filters in the left window of the Expression builder you can
use the predefined filters that appear in the right frame.
Word filter
It filters the elements whose alphanumeric fields, visible or not, contain the right words, as written in Internet search engines:

It is not necessary that the words are complete; with door appears elements as door and doors.

You can put expressions in quotes, such as white wall.

Separator It equals to Example


Filter elements containing
or
door window
door or window
+
and
+door +window door and window
Use interface 23

not

+door -window

door, but not window

In concepts windows are also looking at the keywords associated to


the concept.
Include the Text window and associated files option also active the
search in the texts associated to the concept.
Remove filters
Cancel all user filters and retrieves the default filter in the layout.
Filters can also cancel by closing the window or change the layout.
To cancel only the mask, enter * in the mask to apply to the layout.

Text windows
It let editing texts in the formats supported by Presto. The Gallery
window has the same behaviour when it contains a text.
The options allow you to add the most common format attributes.
Other attributes, such as tables, numbering, bullets and pictures, are
also supported if the text comes from other programs. The undo option in this window is only for changes in the text.
Multibit characters such as Unicode can be used in text windows, but
its format may be altered by some tools Presto related texts.
Translate
Translate the text to the specified language in TOOLS: Translate text
options.
Export | Import
Export or import the text in RTF or TXT format.
Word wrap
It displays each paragraph on a single line of unlimited length.
Pass associated file
It converts the text in a file associated to concept, with the TEX aspect.
Create table
It creates a table in the text, with an optional header containing specific columns for testing.

24 Manual de Presto manual

Check ortography
It checks the words in a dictionary, available for Castilian and Catalan
as the project language displayed on VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous.
Translate text
This option of the TOOLS menu takes the translation of the texts of
the work to the selected language. It also allows translate some Presto fields, depending on the selected language.
You can use the services of Google for translation automatically to
any of the supported languages, keeping the format of faithful text to
the original, with some exceptions, such as managing the size of images and translation of texts with images.
Translation is better if the texts do not contain abbreviations or misprints.
If the translation process aborts, part of the project will remain untranslated, so it is better not to save the changes and repeat the
translation from the start.
User Dictionary
The translation generates by default a file Dic.RTF which is a dictionary with pairs of messages, with the original text and its translation.
This file is usually contained in Presto configuration directory, but you
can change its name and location.
The dictionary has the following advantages:
It avoids send to Google messages that have already been
translated, saving cost and time.

It is an alternative for translations if you have not the translation service offered by Google.

You can change the translations, obtaining better results each


time.

If red cells without content in the dictionary, future translations of the


text are not performed, so be deleted rows that are willing to translate, or even delete the file.
Google key for translation
The user must have an API key Google translation, and must accept
the specifications and conditions required by Google at any time.
First you must be registered on Google: https://accounts.google.com
Use interface 25

The translation service is available at:


https://code.google.com/apis/console
In Services, find Translate API and verify compliance with manufacturers requirements.
To get the key, go to API Access section API key.
Improve and customize Google translation
If you want to improve the translation by Google, you can create a
dictionary that changes the translation, replacing the keyword obtained by Google with another appropriate to the local context.
Example:
estimate=Estimate
The dictionary is a text file called fixtranslation.txt and must appear
in the configuration directory of Presto.
Features:

The conversion is case sensitive.


It lets you writing comments in the text, after the character ;

Special characters are written putting first the \

Working with Text


It lets standardize the format of all texts of the estimate or documents, or delete them.
You can convert selected text to the same font type and colour, convert case sensitive or apply the same justification.

26 Manual de Presto manual

Presto in the design stage


In this manual the terms estimate and project are equivalent.
This chapter describes the processes usually performed by the editor
of the project, including, between others:

Creating of the structure of estimate WBS.

Product of each concept, inflation, currencies and other additional costs.


Detailed measurements, activities and statements of approval.

BIM link: Revit and Allplan integration.

Further documentation of the work, construction agents and


all kinds of files associated with concepts.

Estimate
An estimate is a tree which breaks down into smaller and simpler elements from the chapters to the materials in a hierarchical structure
of levels sometimes known as Work Breakdown Structure, WBS.

Tree estimate
The estimate is created in Tree and Estimate windows and in the
manual is usually called the windows of the estimate.
Concepts
Each element of the structure of the estimate is a concept.
The window VIEW: Concepts shows all concepts type price, ordered
by their Code.

Presto in the design stage 27

A concept may have lower concepts, forming decomposition. In turn,


a concept may be part of one or more higher concepts.
Concepts.Code
To register a concept you must enter a code in one of the windows of
the estimate.
The suggest button, to the right of the field, proposes an automatic
code.
When writing a code, if:

Not found in the work, a new concept is created.

Already contained elsewhere in the work, is also inserted under the new superior concept.

Derived from an existing parametric concept in the work, the


concept derived inserts.

.Unit
Unit of measure to which the unit price is concerned.
.Description
Brief descriptive text, complementary to general text.
This field supports multiple possibilities as:

Change colour via the context menu. Check Presto in the design stage: Estimate: States of approval.

Switch to uppercase, lowercase or fill from text. Refer to Suggest or [F7].

Translate to a language. Check TOOLS: Translate text.


Improving its readability expanding their abbreviations, using
wizards Summary type tasks del cuadro de precios IVE or
Summary type tasks del cuadro de precios Centro.

.Est
Unit Price of the concept as contained in the project estimate. The
unit price of the higher concepts is the sum of the yields of lower
concepts multiplied by the unit price.
There are other prices, which are described in other sections.
.Text
Unlimited text describing the concept. Its introduced in the Text
subordinate window.
.NatC
In this field is the icon that represents the nature of the concept.
28 Manual de Presto manual

When creating a concept, the program chooses the correct code type
and encoding chosen Project settings: Data: Origin but can be
changed later using the contextual menu on the field.
The concepts commonly used in the estimate are those the price type.
Type

NatC Price concepts

Root

Unique concept, superior to all.

Chapter

Groups other concepts.


Chapters under other chapters are called Subchapters.

Work item

Also called Work items, are the key elements of


the estimate that can be measured and certified.

Manpower
Material
Equipment
Others

Also called natures or basic .


If they have decomposition are called Auxiliaries
but still have a specific nature.

The background colour code identifies the type of concept and is


described in the FILE: Environment: Appearance.
If you change the type of a concept that already contains information,
such as converting a work item with take-off lines in a chapter, review
the output, because although not usually remove Presto data incompatible with the new situation, can change their behaviour.
.Nat
This field represents the possible values of the nature of the concept,
and its behaviour varies depending on the site of use.
Use
Column

Behaviour

Example and
results
Work item

It displays the text of the nature.


The column was chosen to be included
in a layout.
Numeric ex- It displays the numeric value of nature. Concepts.Nat ==
pression
The possible values are on track as5
signment options of each nature.
1
The field can be used in an expression,
column or user folder.

Presto in the design stage 29

Alphanumeric It displays the alphanumeric value of


expression
the nature if preceded by %.
The alphanumeric field can be used in
an expression, column or user filter.

Nature + +%
Concepts.Nat
Work item nature

Approval status
Black | Green | Red | Grey
Contextual options are activated in the Summary field, and the results in colour are also seen in the same field.
Concepts.State
Their respective numerical value is 0, 3, 1 and 2.
.DataBlack | .DataGreen | .DateRed | .DateGrey
Changing the state, the concept updates the respective date.
Other fields of the concepts
Some of these fields are used especially in the project root concept,
as indicated in Project information. Others are free use or have specific behaviours for some program options.
The list with all the concepts fields and of the other tables is contained in the expressions builder or in the REPORTS: Design report
window, in the VIEW: Fields list option, with the numerical values of
the fields that correspond to types or statuses.
.Clase
Typology to which the nature of the concept belongs.
.Code2
Alternative concept code.
.Origin
When creating a concept, the root source of the project is copied.
This way you can identify their origin but later copy to another projects.
.Description2
Complementary or alternative text to the description.
.UsrNum
Numeric field of free content.

30 Manual de Presto manual

Other fields help to visualize the structure of the estimate


.EDT
Decimal code with the hierarchical position of the concept. It is visible
in concepts with a single superior.
.Level
Concept depth in the hierarchical structure. The level of the root concept is 0.
.NumInf | .NumSup
Number of inferiors and superiors of the concept.
Prices and alternative units
It lets getting prices based in others inducers or other criteria, such as
floor area, number of rooms or beds, etc.
.EstUnitAlt
This field allows you to display a second price of each concept in an
alternative unit to the main.
.UnitAlt
Unit of the alternative price.
.UnitAltFactor
Field where the conversion factor between the unit and the alternative
unit is introduced.
When you create a chapter, the default value of the conversion factor
is the constructed surface, taken from the general variable SurfCons.
Thus, the chapters alternative price is the price per square meter.
Relations
Between each pair of upper and lower concepts there is a relationship, and is characterized because it is only in the work. The hierarchical structure of the estimate is formed from these relationships.
The decomposition of a concept is given by the number of relationships in which figure as superior.
Every relationship contains the data of the lower concept that is different in different higher concepts. For example, the performance of
a material in a work item or take-off line of a work item in a chapter
are properties of the relationship between the two.

Presto in the design stage 31

The structure of relations is naturally seen in the Tree window. In the


Estimate window, the inferior concept is in the central area of the
window and the superior concept in the header.
Relations.CodSup
Code of the superior concept of the relation.
.CodInf
Code of the inferior concept of the relation.
.Relation
Complete code of the relationship between the upper and lower concept.
.QtyPres
Quantity, yield or measurement of the concept by unit of the parent
in the estimate. As in prices, there are other quantities for certification,
planning and execution, described in other sections.
The take-off of a work item can be entered directly into this field or
disaggregated by take-off lines, as described in Take-off lines.
.AmntEst
Product of the quantity by the unit price of the inferior concept.
.Note
Specific text of the relationship of a concept with its superior.
.UsrNum
Numeric field of free content associated to the relation.
Calculation of prices and quantities
Presto automatically calculates the price and quantity of each concept
when changes the data that affect it.
These values can be associated with various methods of calculation.
Type and value [*] Method of calculation
Manual [0]
Value not calculated, written by the user or process.
Calculated [3]
Value calculated from other data.
Locked [1]
Value written directly, different from that calculated.
Lock and Unlock
Its not saved [2]
Is calculated at each time depending on other values
of the estimate and is not saved with the project.
[*] Values of Concepts.TypeCalcul[1..5] field

32 Manual de Presto manual

To directly modify a price or a calculated quantity, the data those depends their calculations are deleted, such as the quantities or take-off
lines of inferior concepts.
Prices and quantities cancelled
The cancelled fields are not calculating their superior concepts, and
can be included or removed at any time by
Set field as normal.

Set field as null and

The cancelled fields have the gray background.


Concepts.TypeNull[1..5]
It equals 1 if the price is cancelled.
Relations.TypeNull [1..5]
It equals 1 if the quantity on the price structure is void.
No modify the estimate
For not modifying the values of the take-off lines, performances and
prices of the estimate, the user can stop it. Refer to FILE: Working
environment: General: Block estimate alteration.
Calculation options
The following options allow you to set the level of automation of the
calculations.
CALCULATIONS: Prices
It recalculates prices and quantities when are executed global operations, such as updates, importing files, etc.
CALCULATIONS: Calculate all
It performs all calculations, including the results that are not part of
the automatic calculation. Run this option before considering a project as definitive to print or deliver it.
FILE: Working environment: General: Automatic price calculation
You can disable this option to speed up work on very large projects.
Operate with prices
TOOLS menu option that changes all the project prices or the inferiors to a chosen concept applying a different factor to each nature.
Adjust price
TOOLS menu option that modify the yields or concepts prices to
reach a fixed amount of the project or chosen concept, or modify it in
a percentage.
Presto in the design stage 33

Blocked or percentage prices or cancelled prices or yields are unchanged.


The messages window shows the exact applied settings, which may
be more than one. Due to rounding, not always is possible reach an
exact amount. The maximum setting can be obtained by setting in the
project settings rounding for display only.
Do not alter concepts which appear in further breakdowns
This option limits the adjustment to the concepts involved exclusively
in their chosen concept or lower, keeping the price of other concepts.
Fields related to the calculation
Concepts.Date
When you create a concept or modify its price, this field takes the
general date of the estimate, accessible Project settings: Planning. If
the concept has children, price calculation assigns it the oldest date of
all.
Decomposition and adjustments in civil engineering
Prices can be adjusted by using separately or together other fields
that can represent production equipment, adjust the resource
productivity or include losses of material form.
The use of the following fields implies that performance may have
other meanings consistent with the given, such as the number of resources, percentage of dedication, etc. use.
Relations.Factor
Coefficient of the relationship between two concepts, which operates
on the amount as follows:
If the factor is positive, it multiplies.

If the factor is negative, it splits.

The factor used to adjust the performance of a concept without losing


its original value, allowing for example to add a percentage of losses
to a material, consider the terrain swelling or alter the productivity of
a resource.
Concepts.Difficulty
Concept coefficient that operates the quantity or yield of their children of manpower or equipment nature, and affects all pricing structures:

If the difficulty is positive, it multiplies it.

34 Manual de Presto manual

If difficulty is negative, its divided, allowing represent the


equipment production.

Unlike factor is applied globally for each concept, and serves to adjust
yields to the particular conditions of execution, without affecting the
material consumption.
Quantities and total amounts
These fields are calculated if the automatic pricing is enabled. Otherwise grayed.
Concepts.QtyTotEst
Total quantity of concept on estimate.
.TotEst
Concept total amount according to the estimate.
Prices per natures
.MatEst | .MdoEst | .MachEst | .OtherEst | .SubEst
Concept amount according to the estimate corresponding to each
nature, calculated from the inferior level.
If a supply concept is labelled, it is considered not decomposed. The
items accumulate in the OtherEst field, unless they are supplies that
accumulate in Sub.
Fields indicated contain the values for the estimate. Qty be obtained
for other pricing structures, replacing the suffix Est for the corresponding.
Number of manpower or equipment for pricing structures
.QtyMdoEst | .QtyMdoCert | .QtyMdoTgt | .QtyMdoPlan |
.QtyMdoReal
.QtyMdoEst | .QtyMdoCert | .QtyMdoTgt | .QtyMdoPlan |
.QtyMdoReal
The fields contains the number of hours of manpower or equipment
per unit of the concept, calculated from inferiors whose units are
hours.
To calculate the number of hours or amounts of manpower or
equipment based on the take-off of a work item, you can multiply
one of these fields by the measurement, either use predefined expressions available or create those wishing to:

Presto in the design stage 35

hhEst | hhCert | hhTgt | hhPlan | hhReal


hmEst | hmCert | hmTgt | hmPlan | hmReal
Manpower or machinery hours of the concept in a relationship.
AmntMdoEst | AmntMdoCert | AmntMdoTgt | AmntMdoPlan | AmntMdoReal
AmntMachEst | AmntMachCert | AmntMachTgt | AmntMachPlan |
AmntMachReal
Amount of manpower or equipment of the concept in a relationship.
Roundings
Project settings: Roundings
Rounding apply to all operations of official or administrative type,
which are usually tested by third parties, such as the estimate, certifications, invoicing documents, maturities and accounts with suppliers.
The results of operations are stored internally as accurately obtained,
so that if subsequently the number of decimal places is increased,
reappear with more accurate values.
Internal or analytical use operations, as actual costs or sums by natures, are made with the highest precision of the computer and the
results are rounded only when viewing or printing.
Rounding of quantities, as yields and take-off lines are defined depending on the nature of the superior concept, so that all inferior
concepts have the same number of decimal places.
: Roundings for display only
Opera with all the significant figures and provides more accurate results. The number of decimal values are used only for presentation.
: Rounding work items that act as auxiliary
They adapt the result to some particular requirements of price tables
and administration departments.
Indirect costs
Presto takes into account the specifications of the Spanish LCSP, Law
on Public Sector.
Indirect costs represent resources to be used to execute the project
but are not part of the estimate and therefore not invoiced in certifications, as the cost of the project manager or the crane.
The sum of direct and indirect costs is called PEM, Material Estimate
Execution. Presto also uses the expression total cost.
36 Manual de Presto manual

In private project, the estimate is often seen as equivalent to PEM. The


estimated final prices, offered or awarded ones include the direct and
indirect costs, but without explicitly disaggregation.
Percentages and results are in the dialog box Project settings: Calculations.
Automatic indirect cost
In public works, the regulation indicates a certain percentage for indirect costs, which is common to all work items.
You can also enter the percentage manually, as the last element of
each decomposition. However, the automatic indirect costs, in addition to its easy management, has other advantages:

When copying concepts from a database price or from another project, assume the percentage of indirect costs of the destination project.

When a work item appears in the decomposition of another


one, the indirect cost is not doubled, as would occur if is an
explicit part of the decomposition.

Presto applies the percentage of indirect costs indicated in the estimate amounts and certification of certifiable concepts, i. .those as less
of a chapter and are not chapters. No indirect costs are applied to the
prices of target and actual costs, but calculating the amount of production.
Prices and amounts of chapters and their superior concepts include
the total costs. At inferior concepts, such as basic natures and the
auxiliaries, the prices are only the direct costs.
In all types of concepts, their unit costs broken down into direct and
indirect costs are in the fields:
Concepts.CosteDir [n]
Concepts.CosteInd [n]
Amounts are in the fields:
Relations.PrTot[n]
Relations.Ind[n]
Where n is 1 or 2, respectively, for the estimate and for certification.
In Project settings: Rounding it is possible specify whether you want
the direct cost is round or not before calculating the indirect cost.

Presto in the design stage 37

When using automatic indirect costs is necessary to consider its effects by exchanging estimates with other programs or formats like
BC3 or Excel.
Project settings: Rounding: Do not apply rounding before calculating indirect costs
It fits the computation to the demands of some government agencies.
Overhead, industrial profit and allocation coefficient
In VIEW: Project settings, the Calculation section has several fields
which include these values.
The percentages and the results are used in reports and templates
that generate the summary sheet, and can be seen in the diagrams
windows estimate, adding the Relations.AmntEstAdj column.
Prices and amounts of the concepts of the estimate not include any of
the percentages described below, to be applied only on the total
amount of the PEM.
Project settings: Calculations: PerGeneralExpenses | PerIndustrialProfit
Percentages of overrun accordance with the rules for official work.
: EstTender
: EstAward
It lets the calculation of the low auction.
The value of these fields is entered manually or using the suggest
button, that calculates the amount after applying the percentages of
overrun to the current estimate of the project.
The value does not change but later change the estimate.
: CoefAward
Also called low auction, is the low that is applied in the certification.
The result is seen in the reports of summary of certifications.
Suggest button provides the ratio of the above amounts.
Concepts of percentage type
Codes with % character in its code, with red background, representing a percentage over the concepts that precede it in its breaking
down and that meet the mask specified by the characters to the left
of the character %.
The price of the concepts of percentage type contains the type in
percentage, so each different percentage requires a new concept. This
38 Manual de Presto manual

percentage is always rounded to two decimal places and is not affected by operating prices, adjust or alter the currencies.
The thus one is automatically calculated as the sum of the amounts
divided by one hundred, and displayed in the quantity field.
The percentage amount is the result of multiplying the much per one,
contained in the quantity, by the percentage that is in the price. The
criteria for their calculation can be modified:
VIEW: Project settings: Calculations
Percentage applies only until former percentage
It lets setting the calculation basis only from the previous concept of
percentage type. It is incompatible with the BC3 format.
Round the base before calculating percentages
It lets round the calculation base to which the rate applies.
VIEW: Project settings: Roundings
Using concepts such percentage as accurately
It allows to calculate the amounts of the concepts of percentage type
using all decimal internally have in their field Est.
Organization of the estimate
In general, only those concepts should be organized in hierarchical
order shown in the figure and in the table at the beginning of the
chapter.
To use the Presto resources is advisable to keep an orderly hierarchical structure:
The concepts of type chapter and work must have a unique
superior. Its quantity is always the unity.

A chapter can have lower mixtures directly as chapters and


other concepts.
The predefined reports, colour codes and other program resources support up to six levels of chapters.

Coding
We recommend using a consistent and uniform coding all projects.
Chapters, if not other criterion, use chapters with three-character
codes of CENTRO database prices. In work items is advisable to keep
the original code database prices.
When printing, or before sending the project to third parties, they can
automatically replace the original codes by a decimal coding.
Presto in the design stage 39

Project and reference


In general, an estimate is made copying existing concepts in other
estimates or price tables. To do this you can open several projects
simultaneously.
We call project to the active estimate at all times and reference to
another open project.
Copy of concepts from other projects
To insert a concept from another project, copy and paste or drag the
concept between the two projects. The concept is copied to the destination project with all its associated information in the original project. If its currency is different from the currency of the destination
project, is treated as described in Currencies.
You can copy and paste or drag information between any compatible
windows of the opened projects. If the information is not homogeneous, a question of confirmation is made.
Reduce levels
TOOLS menu options that eliminate concepts by levels or types,
simplifying the estimate without altering prices, whenever possible.
It should always select the concepts to which you want to apply the
option, not their superiors concepts.
Chapters (trades)
It removes the first level of chapters. If there not subchapters, the
work items become dependent root concept and its take-off lines are
lost. The quantity is maintained, but can change the rounding.
Subchapters
It removes all levels of subchapters and work items become dependent on the chapters. If there are repeated work items are grouped in
one, including its take-off lines, if information is uniform. If not, as a
work item with raised quantities in a chapter and take-off lines in another, its grouped the quantity by the total, with disaggregating.
Refer to TOOLS: Restructure take-off lines for converting lump sums
in take-off lines.
Work items
The work items that have decay are removed and the lower concepts
become dependent chapters, grouped if they are repeated.

40 Manual de Presto manual

Auxiliaries
Inferior concepts affect the corresponding superior.
Restructure breakdown
TOOLS menu option that lets you alter the decomposition of a set
of work items.
To operate exclusively with target decompositions use the options of
the PROCESSES menu.
Delete breakdown
It removes from the decomposition of the work items selected the
concepts of the marked natures.
If all natures are marked, the price of the work item is maintained.
Add to the breakdown
It inserts in the work items the concepts introduced in the list, which
must already exist in the project. If the proportions do not sum to
100, yields are calculated pro rata. The original price of the work item
is maintained, except for differences due to rounding or when concepts type percentage are added.
Replace concepts
TOOLS menu option that replaces a concept by another in decompositions that appears, keeping your take-off lines, stages and quantities.
To replace a concept for another in a particular place, you can drag
the new concept over the old pressing the [Shift] key. The cursor takes
the form of [x] and the concept is replaced by the new, keeping the
properties associated with the relation with the superior, as the quantity and the take-off lines.
To add or remove a concept in the decompositions of several concepts simultaneously, add or delete these concepts in the Superiors
window of the first.
Replace according to list
It lets making concepts substitutions in block, from a list of pairs of
codes, original and replacement ones, separated by a tab in a text file
(.TXT).
The concepts that replace the originals cannot exist in the project. In
this case, the data of the concept will be empty, and must be completed or updated with those of another project or table prices.

Presto in the design stage 41

Replacement instructions are executed in the order listed. You can use
masks and unfold and delete codes.
Possibilities
Replace

Original Replacement Result


AB454
PC3465
AB454 is replaced by
PC3465
mask *
1234*
O*
1234HTJ is replaced by OHTJ
Mask?
PQ?5
PTH?5
PQB5 is replaced by PTHB5
Split
AB45
BH23
AB45 unfolds in BH23, BH37
BH37
and BH42
BH42
Delete
TY56
TY56 disappears of the decomposition
The percentages A1
T1
If A1 and A2 are in a same
are not duplicated
%C
decomposition, are replaced
A2
T2
by T1, T2 and %C (once)
%C
Concept update
TOOLS menu option, replacing the information of the project concepts for which they are in another project:

The price table selected in the working environment.


The first open reference.

Another project to select.


Only the price of a concept is updated if not decomposition or if it
changes because of the update.
It takes into account the currency, if different between project and
reference.
To update only the target decomposition use the appropriate option
of the PROCESSES menu.
Updating options
The Only non-protected fields in active window option allows selectively update only the editable fields, in white. You can protect fields
with Protect column option over the menu on the header.
The Add only (never delete) option fills the empty fields only, but
add selected types of information.

42 Manual de Presto manual

Inflation
Presto suggests the appropriate value to update prices between the
date of origin of each concept and the estimate date, and can selectively apply them.
Diary.Index
Monthly inflation indexes must be entered in this field from the window of dates. It only uses the value of the months.
The index can be any base, since they apply in relative terms. If a
month has not defined the index, look for the previous month that
does.
The book Excel price revision index has the inflation rate in the
DATA tab, and you can copy and paste in this field.
Concepts.IPC
Coefficient suggested to update the price of the concept; dependent
on:

The field Date of the concept itself.


The date of the estimate, set to Project settings: Planning.

The ratio between the Index fields of two months, defined


on the diary.
The suggest button on a budget or price target sample these prices
with the coefficient already applied, so it can be used directly to update the price of the concepts.

Currencies
Presto lets you convert the prices of an estimate to another currency
or to make estimates with prices in multiple currencies and in the
same project.
To manage prices conversion, is necessary to define the currencies
used in the estimate, choose the project currency, and the associate
to the concepts their corresponding currency.
Configuration of the currencies used in the estimate
Project settings: Currencies
It is a table where you can enter the specific currency for the project.
CurrISO
Acronyms ISO of currency.
: CurrName
Name of currency, used for example in the reports.
Presto in the design stage 43

: CurrAcronym
Symbol or abbreviation of the currency.
: CurrExchgRate
Exchange rate between the currency and the currency of the
work overall.
General currency of the project
Is the currency in which prices of concepts, except they have one in
their own field Currency are expressed.
You can select:

VIEW: Project settings, under Data, Currency field.


Field Concepts.Currency the Root concept.

Calculation process
The concept price that has children concepts in different currencies
are converted to its own currency during the prices calculation, applying the corresponding parity.
When are imported concepts of a reference in a different currency:

If the original currency of the concept is already in the table of


the project of destination, is transferred to the same price.

If the currency is not on the table of the project of destination,


is added to the table, taking the parity from the original project.

If the currencies table is full, it converts the price to the currency of the project and a message is generated.

Concepts.Currency
Currency of the price of the concept. The suggest button displays the
available in the project.
.CurrExchgRate
Change the currency that appears in the project settings.
.SumPrec
Sum of the prices of the concepts associated to price assignment entities of type Price, converted to the primary currency of the project.
Relations.AmntSumPrice
Amount obtained from the product of the SumPrec and Relations.QtyEst fields.

44 Manual de Presto manual

Converting the prices from one estimate to another currency


If the currency of the work is modified, and both the old currency and
the new are in the table currency will be converted to the new currency prices of all concepts that do not have a specific currency.
Estimate normalized in various currencies to the currency of the work
Each concept has its price and its corresponding currency. The results
are becoming or normalizing to the currency of the parent concept,
until the Root concept or the project.
Estimate in multiple currencies with separate amounts
This system requires:

Estimate containing basic concepts (materials, manpower,


equipment, etc.), or work items without breakdown.
Entities of type Price representing each of the currencies involved.

The use of estimate windows, Price comparison layout.


Each basic concept has a field that corresponds to any of the entities
or currencies, where its price is introduced. The amounts are accumulated at the superior concept without making any conversion, until
the root concept or the project, where the estimate amounts in each
of the currencies involved are seen.
A plugin makes automatically and in both directions, the adaptation
of a standardized estimate in another with independent currencies.
Results of managing estimates in multiple currencies
Estimate in multiple currencies
Parametric concepts
Parametric concepts, with the bottom of the code in orange, containing several questions.
By selecting the answers in the Parametric window creates a derivative concept, with its text, breakdown and price. To copy to the project, use Copy icon and paste it into the appropriate destination.
To use some bases of parametric prices, as the ITEC, it is necessary
previously selecting the parameters of a global parametric concept
associated to the project root concept.

Presto in the design stage 45

Regenerate parametric
TOOLS menu option that regenerates estimate concepts derived
from parametric concepts.
Parametric regenerating can be in the same work, or reference.
When you import a BC3 file, this option runs automatically if exist
parametric concepts containing other parametric concepts, except
that they are compiled.
Create parametric concepts
The user can create his own parametric concepts following the rules
established for its creation.
Specific tools for generating, testing and development, and are described in Service request web of Presto, section estimates: Working with price tables.
Tests and checks
Presto offers many possibilities for testing the estimate prior to print
or generate.
Cross-check two projects
TOOLS menu option that detects differences or similarities between
the active project and another.
The results of the comparison can be sent to Excel or mark in active
project, changing the colour of the description.
Price concepts
This option compares only the information of concepts, regardless of
the budget structure. It is useful to find differences between the prices of the work and a price table.
Other options also taken into account the structure of the estimate,
i.e., the lower concepts and their order.
Mark previously all concepts in black
It removes previously all colours of the description.
Mark differences in red
Make the descriptions of concepts where there are differences.
Mark matches in green
It assigns the descriptions of concepts where matches. It lets validating the concepts of a project respect of several price tables, using the
option successively.

46 Manual de Presto manual

Export to Excel
If in the decomposition of the reference the concept is in another
position, the code in the project is red (differences only) or black
(matches only).
Are not taken in account the concepts of the reference that are not in
the project. To detect them, do the reverse comparison.
Comparing the texts are exported:

256 characters if the concept does not exist in the reference.

The texts to the first difference, plus 10 characters.

9 characters, if the texts match.

Categorization
The category is selected in a dropdown list, which can be seen in the
estimate windows, Help for measurement layout.
A wizard does this automatically, depending on the source and nature
of the concept.
Then the utility that can be applied depending on the nature and category assigned is displayed:
Field

Nature
Root

Utility
Calculate the work term in
months, depending on the
estimate amount.
CatSyst Chapter
Estimates by subsystems,
indirect costs.
CatFunc Work item Checking of surface measurements.
CatMat Material
Quality Control Plan.
Study of waste management.
CatCol All
Differentiating by colour.
Fields of concepts table

Criteria
RD 1020/1993
Constructive Typology, by uses.
CTE systems.
Functional units
Type tests.
LER residue code.

Checking surfaces
On an estimate, areas of the different layers of the items representing
surface elements must be related to measures of other units and the
dimensions of the building.
Each functional element, such as the ground or facade can be assigned up to four layers combined:

Presto in the design stage 47

Category
Functional element
1: Home
2: Auxiliary
3: Coating
4: Finishing

Example
Facade
Walls
Isolation, permeabilization
Plastering, tiling
Painting

Some work items that represent surfaces, but are measured per unit,
as the carpentries, the wizard can deduce the dimensions from the
text contained in the description, where explicit. Thus, fills m2 as an
alternative unit in the UnitAlt field and the surface in the UnitAltFactor conversion factor.
Concepts.Category
The internal value of the category is obtained by adding the number
of the row and the header; for example, the pitching is 0.122.0.0.
Internally, the field contains an IP address number, with four groups
of values separated by a dot:
Chapter.WorkItem.Material.Color
It can be assign to each group its own category, regardless of the
type of concept that is. The new concepts take the categories of the
superiors.
Surface analysis by categories
This report of 01 Estimates and take-off lines group, shows grouped
the similar categories, so that they can easily recognize discrepancies
and errors.
Results of the estimate
The documents required to present the estimate are obtained with
reports and templates, which can be printed on paper, exported as
PDF, or RTF format for later editing.
Reports of the group 01 Estimate and take-off lines:
Estimate and take-off lines
Document with all the necessary information for printing the estimate,
with or without text, take-off lines or prices.
Summary of the estimate
Report printed or Excel workbook with the list of chapters, with percentages of cost overrun and signatures.
48 Manual de Presto manual

The obtention of the summary sheet requires that the project identification data be enlisted and the Developer and Proyectist entities, as
described in Project information.
Database prices 1 and 2
Document for administration, with the texts of the work items and
their unitary prices in letter (prices table number 1) or its decomposition by natures (prices table number 2).
Database prices 1 and 2 by chapters
Similar to previous, showing the work items grouped in its corresponding chapter.
Table of decomposed
It prints work items, choosing selectively the properties and the desired format of the decomposition.
Table of broken down by chapters
Similar to previous, showing the work items grouped in its corresponding chapter.
Database prices disaggregated by natures
Prices table in which each work item is broken down by each of the
natures that built it, showing the yield and price of each.
If there is any auxiliary work item, is considered material.
Total quantities required by work items
It displays the work item and their decomposed. For each of them, it
shows the quantity of the decomposed required for making the work
item take-off lines.
Auxiliary concepts
List of basic concepts with decomposition.
Basics
List of concepts by basic natures, which generates reports of materials, manpower and equipment.
You can include the total quantities and prices.
Partial estimate
Partial estimates are considered the work items that have, as inferior
concepts, some work items with take-off lines.
Work items
List of work items ordered by any criteria you choose.
Presto in the design stage 49

It has two separators that indicate 20% and 80 % of the amount of


the project, allowing you to quickly identify work items with more
impact on the estimate.
Estimate with decomposed and measurements
Similar to the report of estimate and take-off lines; it adds the decomposition of the work item, and change the format of the header
of the take-off lines.
Texts, graphics and specifications
It displays graphical information and the texts of the project.

Stages and activities


This chapter describes the breakdown of the number of work items
for its later tracking:

Take-off lines.

Activities in the take-off line.

Components of the take-off lines.

Advanced tools for reorganization of take-off lines.


Import and check take-off lines.

Take-off lines and concept of activity


The take-off lines are associated with activities through the dropdown
field Activity. The text in the list of activities is contained in the Description field of activity, and can be changed by accessing the Activities window.
Meaning of activity
An activity may represent a different criteria that allows grouping the
results obtained from the take-off lines, alternative to the estimate
structure:

Areas, plants or portions of the project.

Stages of execution.

Tasks functional groups or construction processes.


Each take-off line of a work item is associated to an activity, which
allows to obtain a matrix structure of both.
Description
Quantity Act1
Work item
5.620
300
Measurements by activity
Act1

100

50 Manual de Presto manual

Act2
600

Act3 Act4
1.500 120

Act5
3.100

Description
Act1
Act2
Act2
Act3
Act3
Act4
Act4
Act5
Act5

Quantity Act1
200
100
500
800
700
50
70
1.300
1.800

Act2

Act3

Act4

Act5

Similarly, the amounts for each activity of each work item involved in
each activity are calculated.
Create, edit and view activities
The activities are managed in the VIEW: Activities window, where
you can create and edit, and generally behave like any other item.
You can also create in the estimate windows, allocating the Activity
nature, and in the take-off lines.
This window has similar layouts and multiple fields to the estimate
window, as several subordinate windows:

Text and Thumbnail, with the same functionality as indicated


for concepts.

Work items, to display the work items with take-off lines associated to each activity and its corresponding quantity.

Resources , to display the resources needed to perform the


activity. These resources must first be calculated using the
PROCESS: Calculate resources option.

Children, to display the activity optional breakdown.

Uses and possibilities


Like any concept, an activity can be part of the decomposition of a
chapter, or can be decomposed into other concepts.
For example, you can copy a group of activities and paste them in the
decomposition of a chapter. This structure allows the distribution of
activities in the Gantt chart, described in Temporary Planning.
Effects to consider this organization:

The quantity of the activity is the unity, as in the chapters.

Presto in the design stage 51

To not duplicate the project amounts, should be properly annulated the quantities or prices of the estimate structure chapters or from activities.

If in the decomposition of a chapter activities and work items


are mixed, the result by stages in the chapter cannot be uniform. It prevails in this case the calculations obtained from the
activities.

Fields
Activities.Number
Activity number; is independent of the code. Never change even
change of type or code.
In the window of activities, listed in order by this field.
.Code | .Description
Equivalent to the same fields of concepts table.
Create and modify take-off lines
In general, you can only enter take-off lines in relations where the
superior concept is a chapter and the inferior is a work item.
If the superior concept is another work item, you can enter take-off
lines to create partial estimates or break down a yield, but cannot be
associated to stages, as indicated in The certification.
A work item can appear in different chapters with different take-off
lines.
Insert and delete take-off lines
Enlisting a take-off line:

It is associated to the last used activity, which appears in the


header.

If it is visible the Activity column, which shows the colour or


approval state, the last state used is repeated.

Stage numbers whose columns are visible are copied.


While copying existing lines activity is not altered, but takes into account the above two behaviours.
Therefore, before adding or copying take-off lines, make sure be on
the right layout to the desired result.

52 Manual de Presto manual

Similarly, while deleting a take-off line only the fields that are visible
are deleted. The line only disappears completely if not contained in
any stage.
Take-off lines edition
For example, to repeat the value of a cell in a column, simply copy the
value, select the desired range and paste.
Presto specific options, accessible via the context menu, add other
possibilities such as:

Operate the selected fields using an expression.

Copy the top field [F9].


Copy field on the left [Shift + F9].

Use the suggest button, that shows the most commonly used
values in the upper rows, and their variants [F7] and [Shift +
F7].
Sort and filter by various criteria.

You can also insert lines and drag them to change their order, as in
the rest of the program.
Fields of take-off lines
TakeOff.Est
It is a flag that indicates whether the take-off line is included or not in
the estimate and not affect to the rest of pricing structures.
They are not included in the estimate lines whose approval status is
Red or do not have assigned any Activity.
Check compatibility with earlier versions Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Data and general properties of the project: Comp1200.
Relating to activities
.Activity
The association of activities to the take-off lines lets:

Analyse the draft Alternatively, as described in Presto in the


design stage: Take-off lines: Take-off lines and concept of activity.
Get automatic subtotals.
Match the take-off lines from one work item to partial measurement of another.

Presto in the design stage 53

You can create activities directly in the dropdown list, selecting the
next available number, which appears with the sign +.
The take-off lines without activity not belong to any pricing structure.
The background colour of this field indicates the approval status, explained in another section.
The amounts of the activities are calculated in CALCULATIONS: Takeoff lines and can obtain the values of all fields that depend on the
allocation of the take-off lines to estimate status and to planning,
certification and execution stages.
Relating to the dimensions and rounding
Concepts.RedParc
Number of decimals fields dimensions, quantities and subtotals are
used in rounding. The work item total sum is rounded to the number
listed for the quantities of work items.
Each work item can have a specific rounding in their take-off lines,
which is introduced in this field in the concepts of work item nature.
This field can be found in the window of concepts, Work items:
Take-off lines layout, or may be included in any layout of the estimate windows.
Take-offLines.N | .Length | .Width | .Height
The N column does not round decimals or apply thousand separators.
Cancel | Uncancel
It lets respectively include or not the value of a dimension or formula
in calculating the quantity of the take-off line.
Cancelled dimensions have grey background, and generally treated as
if its contents were nothing.
.Quantity
It is the product of the four columns of dimensions other than zero,
except when take-off lines formulas were used.
Instead of using dimensions, you can write directly a total quantity,
which will appear in black colour.
Other values
TakeOffLines.UsrNum
User numerical value associated to the take-off line.

54 Manual de Presto manual

.Perimeter | .Surface | .Volume


Resulting values for different measurement units. Usually come from
BIM models and allow the user to select the most appropriate to your
measurement criterion value.
Subtotals and sums
You can create intermediate take-off lines to see subtotals, with the
sum of the quantities in the lines from the subtotal immediate last.
.QtyPres
The values of subtotals are in the field or its equivalent in other pricing structures, as they may be different in each.
The grey background colour indicates that it is not included in the
estimate.
.Type
Equals 1 if the take-off line is a subtotal.
.OrQtyEst
This field, and their equivalents in other pricing structures, contain the
sum of all the lines, to source.
Project settings: Calculation: Automatic subtotals in take-off lines
It generates an automatic subtotal after each group of take-off lines
with the same activity and approval status. Also assigns a subtotal to
the last take-off line. This option:

It removes all existing manual subtotals.

Disable options

Regular and

Interval subtotal.

Interval subtotal
On a take-off line, the line becomes a subtotal.
Regular
It converts a subtotal line in a normal take-off line.
Split
It creates a take-off line from the line to unfold.
The program asks the quantity and dimension to transfer to the new
line:

If the line has not dimension, it duplicates the original.


If it has any dimension, asks the quantity to unfold in the following order: N, Length, Width, Height, Qty.

The N field is not taken into account if it is either 0 or 1.


Presto in the design stage 55

Take-off lines fields concerning identification


TakeOff.Comment
It includes additional information to the take-off line.
.Note
User text associated to the take-off line.
.Relation | .CodSup | .CodInf
Relationship between two concepts, top and bottom, to which the
measurement line belongs.
.File | .Layer | .Zone | .Plant | .Area
Complementary fields that can come from drawing programs.
.Color
It affects the commentary colour and has the same colour list of AutoCAD.
.Element
Take-off lines identifier used by different connections BIM, which facilitates the location in the model.
.Guid
Unique identifier of the take-off line generated by Presto. In some
cases it copies from the GuidBIM field.
.GuidBIM
Unique identifier of the take-off, in IFC format, used for some connections with BIM models.
.BIMCode
Original code of the work item of origin of the line.
.FamilyBIM
Family name in the model.
.TypeBIM
Name of the type in the model
.Date
Date and time of the work session, which corresponds to the opening
of the project.
.Origin
Origin of the take-off line, and you can choose through a list. Each
element corresponds to a numeric value that can be used in expressions.
56 Manual de Presto manual

Value Origin
1
Presto
2
DWG
3
Take-off lines wizards
5
Allplan
8
Revit
9
BC3
10
Primavera
Sources of take-off lines
Take-off line expressions
When the elements to be measured are not orthogonal prism, is easier to introduce into the take-off lines other geometric dimensions. For
example, the measurement of rounds of steel is more legible when
the diameter in millimetres is introduced instead of the section in
square meters.
Take-off line formula
This option lets you assign predefined selected lines, which can be
edited in FILE: Working environment: Formulas formulas.
TakeOff.Formula
The expression is written in this field and may contain:

The A, B, C and D letters (in upper or lower case) to refer to column N, Length, Width and Height respectively.
Columns that do not explicitly appear in the expression act
normally, multiplying the result.

Numbers, using the dot to separate the decimal part.

The four arithmetic operators.

La exponentiation"^".
The letter P as equivalent of pi.

The following functions are also supported:


Function
ABS (x)
SQRT (x)
SIN () COS () TAN ()

Result
Absolute value.
Square root.
Trigonometric function of the angle, in degrees introduced.

Presto in the design stage 57

Function
Result
IPE (C) IPN (C) UPN (C) Profile cm2 section of each series in the syllaHEA (C) HEB (C) HEM (C) bus of Arcelor, with its hedge in mm in the
column C.
L (C, D)
Idem, in function of wing and thickness.
REBAR (C)
Weight of a steel rod with diameter in mm in
column C.
In the example of the steel bars, the appropriate expression to introduce the diameter in millimetres in the Width column is:
(C^2/100)/4*P*0.785
In the Formula field you can enter measurements with arithmetic
expressions without using dimensional fields, such as:
(70*12.5)-3*10*10
Examples of formulas applicable to take-off lines
Comment

N Length

Width

Height

A B
Triangle
N Base
Trapeze
N Base1
Circle
N
Circumference
N
Earthworks d = 20 N Area1
m (*)
Earthworks d <> N Area1
20 m ( *)
Ditch between
E Base
sections of 20 m m
ba
nk
m
en
t
Armor
N Length
Metal profile
N Length

C
Height
Base2

D
Thickness
Height
Height
Height

Area2

0.5
(B+C)/2
B^2*P/4
P
(B+C)/2*20

Area2

Distance

(B+C)/2

Cota
red1

Cota
roja2

(B* (C+D) +
(C^2+D^2)/A)*10

mm
Area
cm2

(*) d=distance
The REBAR formula corresponds to steel reinforcements.
58 Manual de Presto manual

Formula

REBAR(C)
0.785

In profile in L, it is considered that the wings are the same size H.


Results of take-off lines with formulas:
N Length

Width

Height

A
1
1
1
1
1
1

B
5,00
5,00
5,00
5,00

C
2,00
2,00
2,00
2,00

D
3,00
3,00
3,00
3,00

5,00

240,00

Formula
A * (B / C) * D
(B / C)
4
5-3
3 + (5 + 4.5 + 0.5) * 2
IPE (C)

Quantity
7,50
7,50
120,00
60,00
23,00
195,50

Measurement formulas associated to the concept


Concepts.Formula
This field allows you to associate a default formula to the concept,
which will apply to new take-off lines that are created associated to
itself. It also automatically associates a formula to the concept if is
associated manually to all their take-off lines.
In any case, the active formula is contained in the take-off line, which
may be different from the overall formula of the concept.
.TexComment | .TexN | .TexLength | .TexWidth | .TexHeight
The headers of these columns of take-off lines can be customized for
each concept using these fields.
These headers provide guidance to fill them when they have associated formulas and are printed in reports of take-off lines.
Measuring by approval statuses
To get the necessary information when additions or modifications on
the project, must be entered as take-off lines and associate to an estimate approval status.
Initial estimate (black) | Approved change (green) | Pending
change (red)
The approval status is selected using the context menu in the take-off
lines, and identifies with its background colour in the field of activity.
The manual will refer to these states either by name or colour. The
suffixes in this table are used in many Presto fields and tables, so it
should be taken into account unless otherwise indicated.
Presto in the design stage 59

TakeOff.StateEst
Field that contains the status of the take-off line.
Status
Initial estimate
(black)
Approved change
(green)
Pending change
(red)

Value Suffix Approval status


0
Ini
Initial project estimate.
2

Mod

Pend

Modified, amended or approved


changes.
Estimate pending of approval. No
addition to the estimate.

Results by activities
In estimate windows and layouts
You can see the overall results of each work item and chapters to
which they belong.
The take-off lines of each work item are in the Take-off lines subordinate window.
As the measurements are associated with one or more activities, you
can view the results of each activity for each work item and chapter in
the Activities subordinate window. These results can also be seen in
the multiple fields of the estimate windows, indicating the initial
number of the activity you want to view.
In the Activities window
You can see the results of the estimate for each activity, and its
breakdown by natures.
In the sub window Work items work items containing lines measuring the activity and the amount that is involved.
Reports of the group 01 Estimate and take-off lines
Activities by work items
It is an estimate by chapters and work items whose quantities are
broken down by activities that are associated with take-off lines.
Basics concepts for activities
Activities with their work items, and resources or basic concepts
needed.
Measurements by activity
Activities with their work items, and take-off lines associated with
both.
60 Manual de Presto manual

Estimate and take-off lines by activities


Its a traditional variant of estimate, in which the take-off lines are
sorted by activity, regardless of its order within the take-off lines of
each work item.
Measuring transfer
The task of measuring a project greatly is faster if the measurements
of some key elements are reused to generate others. This occurs, for
example, if the coatings are generated based on the measurements of
the enclosures.
Presto allows you to insert in a take-off line a reference to the results
of other take-off lines of the estimate, which will be automatically
updated if they change.
Link to work item
The option is also available with the suggest button in the Formula
field, and displays a dialog box with two types of information:

The structure of chapters and work items with a breakdown by


activities.
Quantities for the selected work item or activity.

Quantity
Formula
Total quantity
=CodSup/CodInf
Quantity in one of their activities
=CodSup/CodInf/Code de la activity
Sum of values in a column
=CodSup / CodInf.SumDimension*
Most repeated value in a column or =CodSup / CodInf.ModeDimension*
mode
Perimeter in plant
=CodSup/CodInf.PeriHor
Perimeter of the front face
=CodSup/CodInf.PeriVert
Perimeter of the side face
=CodSup/CodInf.PeriHor
Horizontal surface
=CodSup/CodInf.SurfHor
Surface of the front face
=CodSup/CodInf.SurfVert
Surface of the side wall
=CodSup/CodInf.SurfSide
Volumen
=CodSup/CodInf.Volumen
Sum of negative lines
=CodSup/CodInf.Discount
* Dimension can be Length, Width or Height.
Check the consistency of the results:
1. When void dimensions are used, because they are taken in account.

Presto in the design stage 61

2. When copying and pasting take-off lines between different works,


because the activities of both works cannot match. If the activity does
not exist in the work of destination indicated in the formula by
<Act??>.
The mode, or more repeated value, lets identify the height of the partitions, regardless of isolated sections of another height.
The sum of lengths allows obtain the sockets from the measuring of
the partitions.
The sum of horizontal surfaces lets to calculate the cleaning concrete
of foundation from the volume take-off.
These values also lets quick check the take-off lines, and can be seen
for all work items in Help for measurement layout of the estimate
windows.
Reference fields from take-off lines
Relations.SumN | SumLenght | . SumWidth | .SumHeight
Sum of the values in each column of the take-off lines.
Relations.ModeN | .ModeLenght | .ModeWidth | .ModeHeigth
Most repeated value of each column of the take-off line.
.PeriHor
Summation of (Length * 2 + Width * 2) of the take-off lines.
.PeriVert
Summation of (length * 2 + height * 2) of the measurement.
.SurfHor
Sum of (Length * Width) of the take-off line.
.SurfVert
Sum of (Length * Height) of the measurement.
.SurfSide
Sum of (Width * Height) of the take-off line.
.Volumen
Sum of products of all dimensions of the take-off lines.
.Discount
Sum of quantities of all negative take-off lines.

62 Manual de Presto manual

Go to reference
It is situated in the work item corresponding to the source of the reference.
See the references of a project
In VIEW: Take-off lines, Take-off lines references layout, are all
cross-reference between work items.
References.Destination
Ratio of the take-off line which contains a reference to the take-off
line of another work item.
.Origin
Relationship of the referenced work item from the Formula field of a
take-off line.
.Activity
Identification of the activity of the referenced work item.
Restructure take-off lines
TOOLS menu option that lets doing automatic operations to create,
copy and merge take-off lines.
Replace references for take-off lines
This option replaces the take-off line with the reference by all referenced lines, so that the total result of the calculation is not modified.
Its necessary to print the take-off lines with all its detail, or to perform certifications and other operations of tracking, which are different in the original work item and in the destination one.
Convert lump quantities into take-off lines
It creates the take-off lines of the selected work items that be necessaries to reflect the quantities entered directly into the work item or in
stages, which become calculated (magenta).
It lets continue in form disaggregated the work started with lump
sums.
Consolidate take-off lines
Several options allow recast take-off lines that are equal or similar. If
not items selected, applies to all.
These options are also accessible from the context menu of the takeoff windows. In this case the selection is made with take-off lines to
consolidate.
Presto in the design stage 63

Some fields of the take-off table are not taken into account when
comparing lines will be consolidated: Guid, GuidBIM, Item,
Date, Source, Type, Id.
Consolidate equal lines
Merges into a line of take-off lines identical except the N field. The
N field is the sum of the consolidated N.
If the line contains a formula that applies to the field N an operation
without the distributive property, the result of the consolidation will
be inaccurate. For example:
N Length
Line 1
2 3,00
Line 2
3 3,00
Result
5 3,00
Correct score: 99.00

Width
4,00
4,00
4,00

Height
5,00
5,00
5,00

Formula
Quantity
(A+B)*(C+D)
45,00
(A+B)*(C+D)
54,00
(A+B)*(C+D)
72,00

Consolidate similar lines


In this case, the lines can have a different dimension. Replaced by a
line where N is the unity and the field with different dimension contains the sum of the products of the N field and the different dimension for consolidated.
No lines having formulas are consolidated, because the described in
the previous option can be applied to any columns.
Consolidate lines by stages
It groups lines of equal measurement, but belong to different price
structures. For example, recasts two equal lines that are separately in
the estimate and in a phase of certification.
Find the work item to which a take-off line is
Go to work unit
Stands as active heading to which the take-off line belongs concept,
and is shown to activate windows estimate.
Edit or delete take-off lines in all the project
In the VIEW: Take-off lines are all take-off lines of the work, and it
can modify or delete dimensions, change of activity or status, or even
eliminate all take-off lines.
You can also delete all take-off lines on VIEW: Project settings: Tables, option, eliminating Take-off lines table.
64 Manual de Presto manual

Take-off lines importation


Importing measurements inserted into the current, or destination,
take-off lines coming from another work, the work of origin or reference work.
This option allows you to import, among other possibilities:

Measurements that come from Cost-It, the Revit Plug for Presto.

BC3 files, XCA or any other, previously imported to a new


work.

Changes to the estimate or planning made on a copy of the


work.

Certifications current estimate, introduced in a copy of the


work.

As always measurements are imported from another work, in this intermediate can work out the checks and modifications as are appropriate before making the transfer to the current work.
The import is run from FILE: Import: Measurements or the Import
window VIEW: Temp take-off lines icon. In this window all the required checks and final transfer to the work performed.
While importing take-off lines, existing temporary take-off lines are
erased, and during import:

Are not taken into account the lines without associated activity, and not part of the estimate.
In lines that contain references to other measurements it is
checked whether the number is still correct. If not, the total is
kept, but the dimensions and cancel reference.

Imported lines can be inserted directly into the work or previously


compared with existing to detect changes and combine new information with existing, as indicated below.
The Transfer icon inserts into the work the selected lines or all, if not
selection, and removed from the temporal window and table. The
lines not transferred remains in the work.
Comparison
The Only lines of the same origin allows checking only between the
lines that have the same content in the Origin. This option allows
updating the take-off lines come from a specific source without disturbing the rest of the information entered by the user.
Presto in the design stage 65

The fields in the window are generally the same as measuring lines
contain duplicates to display the value on the existing line and the
new, in this case, the Org prefix.
The schemes allow to show the data available for each case, including
the amount representing each variation. For the scheme New units of
work is not required beforehand checkout.
If the take-off lines of the reference contain elements from Revit, the
option can be used
model.

Copy to Revit and locate the element in the

Search for missing lines


It detects all take-off lines that exist in the project but not in the takeoff lines of the reference. You can view this information in the corresponding scheme and decide whether deleted or included in the final
transfer.
Check
This process seeks Guid identifiers in all take-off lines of the reference in existing measurements on the work. If exists this identifier, the
two lines are matched, and otherwise it is considered that imported
line is new.
TakeoffLinesTmp.Checked
Indicates whether or not the line is checked.
Comparing lines are not taken into account some special fields. In
each case the program will take the right decisions.
Field
Relation
Activity
Date
Type
UsrNum
Id
Note
StateTgt

Performance
You can change both the work item code as the chapter to
which the line is assigned.
It fits the existing in the work of destination, if not exist.
Are made of imported line.

It is taken from imported line. It allows transferring messages


between agents without considering that the line is different.
It is not used.

66 Manual de Presto manual

Review and assign work items


The first step before the transfer is to review the work items and
chapters assigned to lines of imported measurement.
.OrgRelation
This field contains the chapter-heading covered by the take-off line is
assigned relationship. Its content may come from several sources indicated in the table below:
Color
Description
Chapter/Work item Relation of imported work.
Chapter/Work item Relation of imported work that does not exist in the
work.
Chapter/Work item Relation that has been modified by the user.
Chapter/Work item Relation that has been modified by the checking
process.
Colours and meaning of assignments of work items
.DescriptionSup | .SrcSupDescription
Chapter Summary or higher concept in the work and reference, respectively.
.OriDescription
Description of the work item in the reference.
.CodInf | .ScrCodInf
Code of the work item, the background colour is taken from the state
of concept work and reference, respectively.
Mapping options
Suggest box lets to assign a work item or modify existing manually.
Several systems of automatic assignment, based on the Code,
FamilyBIM and TypeBIM concepts and measurements fields are
also available.
By inferior code
Search on site the first relationship whose lower code equals the
line time measurement, and assigns temporary measure the relationship found.
Per family and type (heading)
It searches on work the first relation whose inferior has a family
and BIM type that matches to the line of temporal take-off line. If
found, assign the inferior code.
Presto in the design stage 67

Per family and type (measurements)


It searches on the project the first take-off line whose family and
BIM type matches the temporal take-off line. If found, it assigns
the inferior code of the relation of the take-off line.
The concepts and relationships needed to attach the lines to pass that
do not exist are created automatically. If not possible, the line is not
passed, the State field is as Untested and Action field is like Insert.
Treatment of the activities
The activities that are assigned measuring lines in the reference may
be the same or different from the work.
.SrcActCode | .ScrActDescription
Codes and summaries of the activities of the reference. If there are
differences with the data of the work the background colour shown in
the table shown.
Background
colour

Description

By transferring

The activity exists in the reference


and the work.
The work has an activity with the
same description than the reference
activity, but the activity number is
different.
The activity does not exist in the
work.

It remains the
same.
It prevails the
number of the
work.
A new activity is
created.

The box suggest about the SrcDescriptionAct field to assign a takeoff lines available activities.
Result of the transfer
.Action
This field indicates what will happen to the measurement line if the
transfer of the work is done.

68 Manual de Presto manual

Action

Description

None

By transferring
Not transferred.

Imported line and your partner in the work


are identical or not provide price changes.
Value: 255 or 244 (respectively)
Insertion
The imported line is new.
It is inserted
Value: 0
in the work.
Actualization The imported line and the work one are the Stage fields
same except in one of the stage fields.
are updated.
Value: 1
Erasing
The imported line will modify an existing line The line is
such that will not provide any quantity to any deleted.
pricing structure.
Value: 2
Actualization There are differences in fields that are not
New line
stages fields.
data are
The context menu displays the differences
updated.
detected to help make decisions.
Value: 4
Erasing
Take-off line existing in a work item of the
The line is
current work that is going to receive take-off deleted.
lines of reference, but that line is not among
them.
It represents the case of elements that have
been deleted in the reference after a previous
transfer and therefore should be deleted.
Value: 5
Color table for the field TakeoffLinesTmp.Action
The presented information can be modified, filter, sort and verify as
much as desired to be sure what will occur exactly when executing the
transfer. If you modify a line that is checked, it automatically becomes
an unchecked line.

Integration to BIM
The system integration between Presto and BIM is based on complete
processes geared to actual working conditions.

Presto in the design stage 69

Integration between Presto and Revit


Complete information about the integration is in the BIM
www.presto.es section.
Allplan catalogue
This option FILE: Export will generate a catalogue with all codes of
the estimate or a prices database, facilitating the association of the
work item to each entity model.
The catalogue generated must be copied to the STD data directory,
which should also be the KATALO.TAB file
The catalogue files are located in a directory whose name is the root
concept code of the work, the file is added KATALO.TAB
No supports catalogue names with more than 8 characters.
XCA: Measurements generated with Allplan
By FILE: Import: XCA option, measurements are imported directly to
the active work, creating the necessary concepts if not listed in the
file. To perform a previous check before entering the take-off lines,
you can import on an empty work and then add them your work
through FILE: Import: Take-off lines.

Take-off lines: CAD drawing


The DWG drawings reader lets extracting take-off lines information
from these files from AutoCAD.
You can apply the same system to image files in the same formats of
the Gallery window. These files contain not layers or entities, so that
resources of measurement that use these properties cannot be used.
Only are described the specific options of the CAD window that are
not repeated in the main window of Presto.
File
In the CAD files that have model space and paper space, its taken in
account only the information of the first one.
External references or nested blocks in the plans are broken down to
the last level.

70 Manual de Presto manual

Save the work


It saves within the project, attached to the chosen concept, the drawing is being measured, the state as- found, with defined zones and
without the removed layers.
Double clicking on the thumbnail of this file, CAD window opens directly.
Working environment of the CAD window
Appearance
It determines the appearance of the entities that are being measured
and the shape of the counting point.
Colours
It lets you to choose in the AutoCAD standard table the colours of the
measured entities, the background of the drawing, the drawn lines
and zones. The chosen colour for the measured entities is transferred
in the manual measurement to the Color field and applies to the
comment.
Type of take-off line
Line type with are redrawn the measured plane lines.
VER
The display options are compatible with AutoCAD and are described
in VIEW: Gallery.
Layers
The View button toggles the plane layers for easy viewing and limit
the entities to be measured. The layers that did not originally have
measurable entities are not shown.
You can delete layers you do not have interest to this work. Its content disappears from memory and is not stored on the project, but
not altered in any case the original file.
If there is a concept with the same name of the layer, its summary
appears.
CAD entities
It displays the different types of entities, separated by colour and line
type or block name. It is similar to the layers window, without the delete option.
Areas
The zones are rectangles that can be created on the map to:
Presto in the design stage 71

Add the name of the area to which belongs each entity to the
comment of their take-off lines. If it belongs to several zones,
listed in the order defined in this window.

Restrict the automatic measurement to certain areas, disabling


View.

To zoom on an area quickly.

To create or redefine a zone, double-click on the Zone field or Coordinates and check the two corners in the plane. Change the name
if desired. The first zone corresponds to all of the drawing; you can
redefine and rename it, but if you delete all zones will appear again.
Automatic measurement
It shows the plain measurable entities, such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines and blocks, ordered by entity type and layer, and taking into
account the activated filter options.
To associate a work item to one or more lines of this table, use the
option of suggest in the Work item field.
By associating an item is linked to the type of entity, layer, block
name, colour and line type, allowing you to leverage the association
in other drawings with the same characteristics. The associations are
stored in the PartidasEntidades.TXT of the directory file of Presto. To
remove the associations you have to delete the file.
Export take-off lines
Icon of the subordinated window that generate the take-off lines corresponding to the selected entities, and transfer to Temp take-off
lines, where you can check and change before final transfer.
If not selected lines, crosses all.
During the transfer:

Filled the File, Layer, Element and Zone fields take-off


lines.

In the Color field, inserts the entity colour, as the AutoCAD


table number, which affects the commentary colour.
In the Source field enter the value 2, which corresponds to
DWG.

The comment of the take-off lines forms with the names of


the areas containing the full entity. If not, the file name is
used.

72 Manual de Presto manual

The length of the lines, or the area, if any, is transferred to the


first unprotected field size of the temporary window measurements.

If there is, the height of the lines going to the field Height.

The measured entities are labelled in the drawing as described in


Working environment: Appearance and are not remeasured.
To return to your original position active TAKE-OFF: Measures to
restore entities.
TAKE-OFF
The menu has several options to set the drawing scale, formats and
other alternatives to manual measurement.
Scale factor
It converts the plain drawing unit to desired for measurement. If the
plane is drawn in inches, to obtain measurements in meters the scale
factor should be 0.01.
Roundings
It rounds the plane values up the decimal places indicated.
Measurement format
It determines the properties of the take-off line:
Option
Sign

Perimeter
Area
Total

Description
Changes the positive or negative sign of the field with the
number of units of take-off lines. If you move during a totalization applies to the total result.
It measures the perimeter of the measured entities.
It measures the area of measured entities.
By clicking the icon, the generated lines accumulate in a single line, which is only transferred to Presto pressing the icon
again.
By totalling identical lines the number of units is increased. If
vary in a single field, such as height, its added the field that
varies. If vary in two or more fields, the sum of the partial
results comes to the first field of dimensions that are not
protected and in other fields is entered 1.

Presto in the design stage 73

Reference objects
It facilitates the manual measurement because accurately locates the
selected object, whose terminology is to AutoCAD.
Manual measurement
It lets measuring entities by marking them on the plain. To facilitate
the data entry use the options of TAKE-OFF: Reference objects.
The manual generation of take-off lines is similar to automatic, except
that only takes into account the known fields, depending on the type
of entity and graph format. If the entity does not exist in the plane,
the colour is set in FILE: Working environment: Colours.
The generated take-off lines are inserted in the Temp take-off lines
window, which can be modified and transferred to the estimates own
instructions in this window.
Option
Count

Description
Clicking on a point in the plane a mark is drawn and
counted.
Existing entity It measures lines, arcs, circles, polylines and blocks existing in the plane, selected one by one.
Line by two
Straight segment, the ends may or may not be existing
points
points.
Continuous
It lets to measure perimeters or areas of polygons not
line
existing in the plane, marking their vertices. The line is
automatically closed by noting again the starting point
(provided there is a proper way to refer to objects) or
Close continuous line.
To finish without closing use Cancel or [Esc].
Rectangle
If areas are measured, the dimensions are entered in the
first two unprotected fields.
Other options
Option
Continuous
line close
Cancel

Description
End the take-off of a solid line to the starting point.
It finishes the take-off of continuous lines and entities
that need more than one point. It cancels any orders, and
is equivalent to [Esc].

74 Manual de Presto manual

Option
Description
Measures to It lets measure again the entities measured automatically
restore entities or existing in the plane and eliminates the marks of the
manual take-off.
Drawing window
Party properties
Double-clicking on an entity supported by Presto, or via this context
menu, appear their relevant properties for the measurement, with the
number of similar entities (or equal, in the case of blocks), its length
and its area.
You can mark new entities without closing this window.
Zoom by zone
It lets zoom in on any of the previously defined areas.

An information system
Besides economic data, the estimate may include many other information:
General information about the project.

Building agents involved in the building project.

Specifications and additional files.

Diary with texts, files, and economic data by periods.

Prices per geographical areas, suppliers or other alternatives.


Integrated description of a group of projects.

QMASS integrated quality systems, such as study and plan


health and safety, environmental management and quality
control, as described in The quality management. QMASS.

Data and general properties of the project


Presto lets saving in the estimate a set of general estimate data and
information that serve as the basis for generating other additional
documents and to track the execution.
This information is organized in several groups:

Data pertaining to the root concept.

General variables used in the program.

Variables defined by the user.


Presto in the design stage 75

Connections variables generated by BIM models.

Data
The root concept of the work has the same fields as the other concepts, but some have special meaning.
The most important data for identifying the project can be entered in
Project settings: Data. Some of these fields appears while cataloguing projects with FILE: Projects.
To refer to a field of root concept within an expression, write:
Concepts [Nat == 0] .field
Calculated fields contain the same results as other items, totalled for
the work, and consult on the same schemes.
Concepts [Nat == 0] .Code
The content is copied to the Source field of new concepts. It may
differ from the file name of the work.
To integrate estimates and projects this code must be different in all.
.Code2
The first three characters are used as a prefix to differentiate documents and records created automatically in each project.
.PostalCode | .City | .Province
Fields of postal code, city and province can be filled with the suggest
button from any of them. The code affects the suppliers search.
.Category
Type of construction or use of the building, and is used to estimate
the term.
The list of uses is on the assessed value, RD 1020/1993
.Origin
Coding of reference, which determines the initial nature of the concepts of new creation.
The suggest button shows the supported encodings and the prefixes
of their basic natures. If codification is not on the list, you have to
select the most similar. For example, the encoding of ITG, Instituto
Tecnolgico de Galicia, is similar to IVE and CM.
.SurfCons
The constructed surface of the work is the default value alternative
unit of chapters.
76 Manual de Presto manual

Variables
The general data exists in all works and are complementary to the
root data item.
Generally correspond to settings and data that have been introduced
in each work by:

Options box Properties work except in Data dialog.

Answers given by the user in the reports, templates and wizards.

The generation of variables by some accessories.

Are consulted on the VIEW: Variables window, in the layouts:


Origin Layout
0
User
2
Common

3
4
5
6
8

Reports and templates


Reports and templates
Reports and templates
Wizards
Revit

Creation
Variables created by the user.
Options of Project settings, except Data.
It lets understanding the variable name.
Answers to reports.
Answers to Word templates.
Answers to the Excel templates.
Wizards variables used.
Parameters created by Cost-It.

Variables.Variable
Name of the variable. Deleting a variable is removed from the Terms
table that match this name.
.Value
Value of the variable.
.Description
Description variable.
.Type
Nature of the data that will contain the variable.
.Length
Size in bytes of the variable.

Presto in the design stage 77

.Origin
Origin of the variable.
.User
It equals 1 if the variable has been modified by user.
.List
Wizards specific. It equals 1 if the variable is populated by a list of
default values.
Specific variables Cost-It visible in the scheme Revit
Some of these variables on the diagrams in terms of concepts, providing additional parameter information from Revit.
.Tag
It indicates that the variable is to be exported or printed.
.DisplayUnitType
Unit of measurement.
.UnitType
Type of the measuring unit.
.ParameterGroup
Parameter group.
.ParameterType
Type of parameter.
.Shared
Indicates whether the parameter is shared.
.StorageType
Storage type.
.ReadOnly
It indicates whether the parameter is modifiable.
.Guid
Unique identifier of the variable.
Variables use
To use the value of a particular general variable prefix Work and the
name of the variable, which can be consulted in the Variables window scheme Common is used.
For example, the variable that contains the length of the working day
is:
Work.CalcDurLab
78 Manual de Presto manual

Using user variables


If a personal variable AmountFees is created, you can print its value
in a report with the expression:
Variables[Variable==AmountFees].Value
Groups of variables
Different groups are described below, and for readability, the full text
of the variable is used.
Calculation
Percentage applies only until former percentage
Round the base before calculating percentages
Check Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Concepts percentage
rate.
Automatic subtotals in take-off lines
Check Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Take-off lines and
concept of activity.
Percentage of indirect costs
Check Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Indirect costs.
Other additional costs
Check Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Overhead, industrial profit and low auction.
Consider only documents in approved stages
Check Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Documents of
economic control.
Miscellaneous
Language
The chosen for the project, and affects the spelling checker and
scripted texts, translation of dates and convert numbers to letters.
In the reports, it affects the function that translates:
tr(language1;language2;;languageN)
The texts in the project languages are separated by semicolons.
The order of the language corresponds to the language list of this
option.
When you create a project, the default language is contained in the
language for the program, which is selected in FILE: Working environment: Generals.
Presto in the design stage 79

NumFloors
Used by some wizards and for generating documents.
ProjectCode
Reference data for documents and reports.
IRR
Internal rate of return of all receipts and payments.
Rate
Annual percentage rate to calculate the net present value.
VAN
Net present value of all cash flows.
The calculation of the IRR and NPV is made from the cash flows generated by maturities.
Comp1200
It maintains the compatibility of take-off lines between Presto current
version and versions of Presto 12 and previous, reporting discrepancies are detected.
If a value other than 0 is entered, prevents:

Modify the mark of Take-offLines.Est field, whose status is


approved or pending.
Change of status a line that corresponds to the initial estimate,
if TakeOffLines.Est field is disabled.

Activating the field, through all the take-off lines, and those approved
or pending with Take-offLines.Est field turned off, passes to the
state of the initial estimate.
Creating a project, its value is 0, but if open a previous project to
Presto 13, its value is 1.
Accounting
Name of the tax
It let replaces VAT by another text in reports.
Percentage of VAT on professional fees
Overall tax rate.
Percentage of VAT on construction works
Tax rate applicable to the estimate of execution.

80 Manual de Presto manual

VAT is calculated monthly


Monthly VAT calculation, rather than quarterly, while generating maturities.
Agents of the industry
Entities that represent natural or legal persons involved in the project.
They are listed in the Entities window and let:

Using data on estimates and other documents.

Assign responsibles to the controls.


Participate in the project execution as suppliers or customers.

There are others entities that allow you to assign multiple prices to
other concepts for comparison, as described in Presto at the stage of
project: An information system: Comparison of multiple prices.
The agents follow the definitions of the Spanish LOE. If multiple the
main is considered the first by alphabetical code.
Other fields identify economic values are described in Presto for the
construction company.
Fields that have a specific use in the concepts of entity type are:
Concepts.PostalCode | .City | .Province
These fields can be filled with the suggest button from any one of
them.
.Address | .Fax | .Telephone | .Telephone2 | .Country | .Email
Other complementary data. Mail is used in offers asking.
.Collegiate | .Title
Professionals and agents data.
Specifications
Contract documents
REPORTS: 02 Other documents of the project: Statement of administrative clauses
This Word template generates a list of valid administrative clauses for
conventional building works executed with the traditional procurement and payment system, taking into account the following variables:
Warranty period.

Term for withdrawal of equipment.


Presto in the design stage 81

System security of the contractor.

Compensation by delay end of the works.

Interest of delay.

Technical specifications associated to the concepts


The text of the specification files are text files associated to each concept and a particular aspect, as described in Attached files.
To create a text of this type, from the thumbnails window:

Use

Create Text File or import a file in text format.

Assign the desired aspect with the same context menu.

Double-click if you need to edit.

REPORTS: 02 Other documents of the project: Specification special


technical conditions
This report generates the specification when all texts are associated
with the concepts of the estimate.
Additional Files of the project
Besides all the predefined information that can store Presto, you can
include a wide range of associating files to different concepts, entities
or dates. With it an added value to the project by including technical
specifications, assembly drawings or photographs that guarantee the
quality of the product is obtained.
It lets to associate files:
RTF, to create specifications

Word

PDF

Excel

Vector drawings

Photographs

Video-Audio

Associated files
They can be kept with the project all kinds of files, built to keep all
information related to it, such as:

Reports, plans and texts for specifications.


Pictures and videos for the monitoring of execution.

Scanned originals documents.

Spreadsheets.

82 Manual de Presto manual

A file can be associated with one or more concepts, to a document or


budget, and are always linked to a date.

The concept files, document or date are displayed in the


Thumbnails subordinate window, described below.

The files of all the project are managed together in the Files
window.

Associating files
In addition to the menu options of the Thumbnails window, you can
drag files in multiple ways.

From Windows explorer to a concept or document thumbnails


window. If you drag the thumbnails of the diary or the file
window, remains associated generally to the estimate.

From the Files window to a thumbnail window.

From a thumbnail window to another program. To drag from a


thumbnails window to another, first press the [Ctrl] key.
Each file is saved in the original format in a file of the work.

Presto especially recognizes some formats, and clicking on these files


gallery window opens.
Type
Text
Picture
Drawing

Available formats
RTF, TXT
BMP, EPS, JPG, PCX, PNG, TIF, GIF
DWG, DXF, WMF

In other cases, the program that is associated with the extension in


the operating system opens.
The changes in open files cannot be saved again, except text formats. If
you want to change, save the file and import it again.
Operate files
TOOLS menu option allows you to merge, update and export all
attached files. The total number of files specified in the option header.
In VIEW: Files can restrict the number of files to update or export,
pre-selecting the files.
Update
It regenerates the thumbnails and also updates the files whose path
listed in the Path field, which are accessible and whose date is after
to the Date field.
Presto in the design stage 83

Export
It saves the files in the selected directory, forming the file name with
the ID and name.
Merge
It recasts same files that are associated with more than one concept,
thus reducing the project size.
Operate with graphics
TOOLS menu option that lets you change the format of the selected
images or creating images from vector drawings.
In the conversion to JPG you can specify the desired compression
factor. The quality obtained must be verified by testing.
JPG compression index
0 10 30
Approximate finished size (%) 100 21 11

50 100
8 6

We recommend using JPG for photos, PNG for geometric images.


Thumbnails
It displays an image for each file that is associated to the concept,
document or date.
Thumbnails are created when importing different file types supported
by Presto and the other types whose extensions are associated to
programs that can create them from the operating system, such as
PDF. The remaining records show a generic thumbnail.
Import
Imports a file to associate to a concept.
Transfer file to text
It transfers the text from a text file to the main text of the document
or concept.
Export
It exports the selected files, forming the name of the exported file
with the numeric identifier and the name. For RTF texts, aspect abbreviations are also added.
Create text file
It creates an associated file of RTF type, empty.

84 Manual de Presto manual

Aspects specifications
These options convert associated text files between different aspects
of the specifications.
Associate thumbnail
It lets to associate an image as a thumbnail to the file formats not
supported by Presto, or change in the other files.
Fields of the files
Files are saved in the Files table which has the following fields:
Files.Code
Concept or document associated to the file.
.Id
Unique identifier created by the program.
.Name
When you import the file is the original name or the name of the aspect.
It can be modified without losing the relation to the original file, as
shown in the Path field.
.Path
Directory and file name at the time of importation.
Grey indicates that this file is no longer accessible and the red colour
means the original file date is after the one of the Date field.
.Date
Date of the imported file.
It can be modified if desired, but will not affect the original file. If the
date is prior to the file, it is considered that the file is no longer updated and is red. If the file does not exist, it appears in grey.
.Hour
Date of the imported file.
.Type
File types recognized by Presto.
Type
Undefined

Value
0

Presto in the design stage 85

Facet Specification

Parametric
Image
Revit Family

1: ESP, 2: TEC, 3: PRE, 4: EJE, 5: MED, 6: CON,


7: SEG, 8: GMA, 9: NOR, 10: MAN, 11: VAR,
19: TEX.
20: PAR
30: GRF
31: REVIT

.TypeThumbnail
Thumbnail file format. 41: JPG, 45: PNG.
Normally the thumbnails must be generated with programs homogeneous bits 32 and 64 together.
.Extension
Extension of the associated file.
.Bytes
Size of the associated file.
.ThumbnailBytes
Miniature size of the associated file.
.Facet
Text in RTF or TXT format of the associated file.
Multiples prices comparison
Presto has a system that allows you to assign different prices to each
concept, with the following objectives:
Keep several prices for each basic concept, which may correspond to geographical areas, price tables or suppliers, and get
the estimate corresponding to each alternative.
Request, receive, compare and awarding bids to tender complete projects.
Pricing assignation entities allow associate several prices to each concept to obtain averages and make comparisons.

The pricing entities are created in Entities window, assigning the


entity type as a nature plus:
Type
Price
Bidder

Associates prices to ... Utility


Work items and natures Pricing alternatives geographical areas, currencies, etcetera.
Work items
Compare bids for complete tender.

86 Manual de Presto manual

The system operation is similar, and the differences are:


Properties
Applies inflation
Apply indirect
Use default price
Value if not assigned price

Price
Yes
Yes
Yes
Est

Bidder
No
No
No
NA

Introduction of the prices


The prices can be entered manually, creating the entity of the proper
type and assigning the prices in the comparison layout that corresponds to each type.
In the Entities window, Price assignment entities layout displays
the fields that affect some comparisons, as the dates and surfaces,
and in the All layout identifying data of the entities are displayed.
Entities whose status is Grey do not appear in comparison layouts or
in the calculations. To incorporate an entity in the comparisons, you
must assign it any state other than Grey.
FILE: Import: Prices | Bids
These options import estimates containing prices of either types, creating the entities if necessary.
Layouts of comparison of bids and prices
In windows estimates are layouts Compare ..., showing the prices
assigned to each item for each of the relevant entities. Right layouts
multiple fields, limited to 60 entities of each type, excluding marked in
gray appear. If a multiple field is hidden all hidden, and re-display
restoring the layout.
Remove from comparative
It assigns the Gray status to the entity specified in the header. Not
displayed in the comparison and does not intervene in the calculations.
General layouts
In the Prices subordinate window, In price assignment entities layout, you can check the prices given to the concept by the entity.

Presto in the design stage 87

Annotation of prices
When an entity has not a price associated to the concept, there is not
corresponding relationship in the Prices table and the price is listed
as NA, unlike the null. The [Delete] key makes a price in NA.
To replace the estimate prices by one of the entities, use the copy and
paste options by ranges, or [F7] Suggest.
Calculations vertical (entities)
Presto calculates the amount of the superior concepts from the prices
given by each entity to inferiors, using estimate quantities and the
same colours and rounding criteria, more the specific settings for
each type of entity described above.
Calculations horizontal (concepts)
Presto shows the average of the prices assigned to each concept by
all entities and its standard deviation, taking in account the null prices, but not marked in grey or listed as NA.
Because of these possibilities, the average of the higher concepts may
not match to the sum of the averages of the inferior concepts.
Concepts.MedPrec | .MedOfer
Average price of each concept in pricing entities.
.SigmaPrice | .SigmaBid
Normalized standard deviation, i.e., divided by the average.
Relations.AmntAvgPrice | .AvgBid
Average amount for pricing entities.
Fields multiple price
The prices assigned to each concept by the different entities are
stored in the Prices table, which also contains the contract prices
and the amounts of the linked estimates. Therefore, this table includes all concepts fields with economic meaning.
The table also contains the total allocated during calculation process
to superior concepts that have received them directly.
Visible fields in the comparison layouts are as follows.
Prices.Entity
Code of the entity that assigns the price.
.Code
Concept code the price assigns an entity.

88 Manual de Presto manual

.Relation
Code formed by the sum of the entity and code fields.
.Code2
Alternate code.
.Est
Price entity assigned by the concept, other than contracts.
.Amount
Product of the price of the entity multiplied by the quantity of the
estimate.
.Price
Prices quoted by suppliers to the supply of each contract.
.UsrNum
User numerical value associated to a relationship between a concept
and a pricing entity.
.Description
Original description of the concept in the entity.
.Note
Alternative short text.
.TypePrice
It is 1 if is a calculated price.
.State
State the price of a concept for a pricing entity.
Black / Green: taken in account.
Red / Grey: Not taken into account.
Projects integration
Presto lets you manage, consolidate and view information from multiple estimates or projects, integrating them into a project called central.
This integration allows:

Creating and maintaining databases with the prices and quantities of work items and other concepts that have been used
historically in other estimates.
View all estimates economic data together and projects in
progress, consolidated by dates, areas or any other grouping
criteria.
Presto in the design stage 89

Consult the agents of the building which have intervened in


each of the projects.

The integration is divided into two distinct parts:

Consolidation in a central work of key data that are in the


linked work described in this section.
The management of financial documents, described in Presto
for construction company: Centralized invoicing.

The linked data to the structure of the estimate, such as certification,


planning, contracts and production, are made and always kept in the
projects by separate. However, in the central project all data necessary
for the consolidation are saved, so the results are always available,
although some project is not available at the time or has been deleted.
In all cases, each project continues to have an independent existence,
and information in the central project is updated only when indicated.
Coding of the linked projects
To take advantage of integration is desirable to use a uniform coding,
establishing a unique code for each concept you wish to consolidate,
as chapters, work items, suppliers, suppliers and destinations.
Link work
This PROCESS menu option lets you to associate or link a project to
a central, creating a concept of Project nature in the level of detail
immediately inferior to the root concept. The created concept contains the project overview.
To better observe the initial results, it is convenient to use the Projects integration layout, of the estimate windows.
The Code of the linked project is automatically formed from the
Presto file name, but can be renamed at will.
You can create linked projects manually writing the project code to
integrate, and allocating the nature Project. The suggest button on
the File field allows you to choose the project to link.
Partials grouping in a central work
You can group works to get totals for delegations, zones, customers,
or any other group of projects you want. This arrangement is done
by creating chapters representing different groups, and as inferiors,
should include the linked projects to the corresponding grouping.

90 Manual de Presto manual

Properties of the concepts of project type


They may have inferiors but do not affect their amounts, as they are
relevant to its original project.
Concepts.File
Filename of the linked project.
.Path
Directory where the linked project appears.
It supports relative paths to the location of the central project:
Path
(Blank)
..\
ZONE-B\

Open the linked project located in


The same directory in which the center work is located.
The higher directory to the central work one.
The indicated directory.

Check the linked project


It is an alternative to open works quickly in the context of projects
integration.
Open project
Open the linked project corresponding to the clicked row.
Update information
This option of the PROCESS menu updates:

The concepts of nature Project from the root concept data of


the linked project, except Code and Date.

The concepts of marked type, and if you have any of QMASS


management systems, the information corresponding to the
activated module is updated.

The diary associated with each linked work, if you have the
corresponding module.

The linked works to be imported must be calculated.


The projects updating does not alter the hierarchical structure of the
central project, since imported concepts are not inserted under other
concepts or their children concepts are imported. Nor does it eliminate concepts from the central project, although they are no longer
used in any linked project.
Parametric concepts and percentage type are not imported.
The amounts of each work are linked in the center in their original
currency, so it should be taken into account when analysing.
Presto in the design stage 91

Concepts.Date
Date of the last time was updated the linked project.
If the work:

It is not updated, the field has the background in red.

There is not, the field has a gray background colour.

Consult in the central project the linked projects data


General information of the projects
Information available from the linked projects is queried and managed with the same resources than in the isolated estimates. That is, if
the user wants to see the projects certified amounts, is seen in the
same window and layout that he would see in an isolated project. In
this case, in the estimate windows, certification layouts. If you do not
want include the data in the central project, you can cancel the project price or the quantity, for example to avoid duplicating the
amounts of alternatives or variants of the same estimate.
Linked data to each work linked
The information is queried in the estimates window, Prices of a work
subordinate window. This window has the necessary information to
see the information of each type of data, and generally, shows the
elements with some content. This window has the necessary layouts
to see the information of any data typology, and in general, and generally shows the elements with some content. You can apply filters
available to refine the results.
The list of associations linked data query works in the main window
VIEW: Prices in the schemes of project.
Data associated with the concepts
Are consulted in the concepts window, subordinated window Prices. This window has the necessary schemes to see what works each
concept has been used.
You can see the total quantities of a concept in each project, zones or
groups of projects, as well as for the total of the central project.
Data of entities and suppliers
Are queried in Entities window, Prices subordinate window. In the
layouts you can see data of the financial management of each supplier in each project, areas or groups of projects, as well as the total central work.

92 Manual de Presto manual

Associated data management system QMASS


They are displayed in the Systems Management window, Prices
subordinate. In the layouts can view the works in which the management system entities and agents of the building are.
Data assigned to dates
In the main windows of calendar and date, the information is available
on the entire central, except stages or certifications. The data associated with each work dates are consulted on estimates windows, subordinated window Diary, using the right layouts for the information
you want displayed. Fields belong to the DiaryWork table, and are
equivalent to the corresponding fields of concepts and Diary table.

Presto in the design stage 93

94 Manual de Presto manual

Presto in the planning stage


This chapter describes Presto processes that are usually performed in
the pre-contract stage, after the draft and before starting the execution of the project:

Economic planning.
Financial planning.

Temporarily planning.

Economic planning
This planning contains the needed information to describe the model
of revenues and costs incurred in the work, and is based on two complementary estimation groups:
Cost target.

Accrual scheduled of the execution.

Planning can be done by chapters, work items, basic concepts, activities, time periods, building agents, and a long list of possibilities.
Economic model and pricing structures
The editor of the estimate only considers a price and a measurement,
which are in the project. During certification a new quantity, which
applied to the unit prices of the estimate leads to the certificate
amount appears.
The rows represent the five quantities indicated on the left, from estimate to the execution of the work. The value N is the index is used
to refer to the structure in some areas.
The columns represent the unit prices indicated in the header. Estimated in the estimate price estimated cost columns are added before
starting the work and the actual cost, known at runtime.
Other cells contains results calculated by Presto, applying the quantity
of the line multiplied by the price of the column, either for a work
item, for a chapter or the whole project. Blank cells are insignificant
combinations.
Economic model
Presto applies a work model summarized in the table, in which the
possibilities of the program are based.

Presto in the planning stage 95

N Price
Quantity
1

Estimate
Est
According to the
editor
project
Certification
Cert
According to the
project manager

Execution
Real
Quantity really
executed
Target
Tgt
Reviewed measurement by the
constructor

Planning
Plan
Target to
the current time

Estimate
Est
Price project

Target
Tgt
Estimated cost

Real
Real
Real cost

EV
RealTgt

AC
Real

Earned value
Earned value
BAC
Tgt

Real cost
Actual cost
EAC
TgtReal

Est
Estimate
Estimate

Cert
Certification
Certification
RealEst
Production
Production
TgtEst

Final production Target


Target produc- estimate at
tion
completion
PV

Forecast
Estimate at
completion

PlanEst
Plan
Plan production Planned Value
Planned producti Planned value
on
The economic model of Presto
Name fields of the economic model
The Presto field name that contains the output of each cell is made to
the field of the amount over the price.
For example, production to date, which is the actual amount for the
price of estimate is given in RealEst.
If the price and quantity are of the same structure, the field is written
only once, as in Est, which is the product of measurement for the
price of the estimate.
Several variants on estimate approval states are also contemplated.
96 Manual de Presto manual

AmntTgtEstMod, is the amount of planned production which corresponds to the initial estimate.
All fields are made available from the name, and putting the prefix
table, as shown below.
Value
Prefix
Price
Quantity Qty

Example
Concepts.Est
Relations.QtyReal

Meaning of example
Unit price of the estimate.
Take-off or actual performance
of a concept in its superior.
Amount Amnt Relations.AmntEst
Product of the unit price multiplied by the number at the
superior.
Quantity QtyTot Concepts.QtyTotTgt Total quantity of the concept in
total
the target.
The concepts prices are always unitary, without multiplying by the
quantity. Accordingly, in the work items and basic natures the price of
certification, Concepts.Cert matches the price of the estimate, Concepts.Est. In these types of concepts are just different unit prices, one
for each column, while chapters and the whole project may have different the ten prices.
Using the model
The estimate amount contained in the cell of the first row and the first
column, corresponding to the quantity and price of the project.
The amount of the certification, in the bottom cell, is obtained by applying the certified quantity at all times to the estimate unitary price.
The lower three cells in the same column contain the production,
valuing to estimate price the planned total project, planned and executed, from the constructor point of view.
The remaining amounts follow the terminology of cost control system
known as earned value management and its initials are capitalized.
Breakdown of the fields
From the point of view of time, the quantities are of two types:

The amounts of estimate and target are not broken down


temporarily and fields that depend on them are in the windows of the estimate.
The quantities of certification, planning and execution are
planned by stages, usually months. These quantities and fields
Presto in the planning stage 97

that depend on them are broken down into multiple fields


stages of the estimate windows, the subordinate stages window and windows agenda and dates.
Each field can be broken down in turn by state estimate approval.
Comparisons between amounts
For comparison between two amounts is significant must belong to
the same row or the same column. Thus, the effect of price or quantity that share is cancelled each other and the ratio shows the difference due to another field.
For example, the deviation in cost is obtained by comparing Real
and RealTgt, since these values apply the actual cost and estimated,
respectively, to the actual quantity. The difference measures the deviation in costs, without being affected by possible differences in quantities.
The program also calculates some significant percentages.
Fields
PerCertEst
PerPlanTgt

Meaning
Percentage certificated over the estimated
Percentage of planned work to date versus total
planned work

You can easily get other percentages, deviations and comparisons


using user fields or reports, such as:
Expression
Est - Cert
TgtReal - Real

Meaning
Certification pending
Probable pending cost

Phases of the economic model


The stages are temporary periods when the project tracking is divided. Its creation and overall operation described in Project management: Certification.
The operation is similar for the three pricing structures susceptible to
scheduling by stages: planning, execution and certification.
The quantities and the planning amounts, certification and execution
only include the values of the approved stages. Thus, at any time of
the project can be compared with each other the three scheduled
values.
98 Manual de Presto manual

If you have entered previsional values of execution or certification, you


can temporarily pass the later stages to see the totals.
The sum of the planning to the end of the project is the target.
As certification, the quantities can be entered directly in each stage or
by take-off lines. In this case, each line may be associated with a different stage for all three structures.
If the parent concept is another work item, you can have take-off lines
for breakdown, but cannot be associated to stages, except the planning, to be part of the target.
The project amounts based on these quantities are also scheduled
and are available disaggregated by stages, from the work items to
parent concepts.
Revenues estimate and target of cost
The economic planning lets obtain a cost estimate, or target estimate,
which represents the project execution estimated cost from the point
of view of the construction company and serves as the basis for bid
presentation, versus the project estimate, that represents the sale or
income.
In the PROCESSES menu there is a wide range of resources to automate, update and reorganize the structure of the target estimate.
Either estimates can be obtained from the other, and may have:

Various cost and sales prices, which can be obtained by applying a margin or transfer coefficient, with corresponding
amounts.
Different quantities, if the construction company get different
measurements to estimate, reviewing the draft project.

Economic planning also allows scheduling the execution of target in


stages, to get a temporary breakdown of the cost, control the execution terms and analyse the financial.
From the point of view of the project manager or developer, this
planning can be applied to a target obtained as a copy of the estimate, without differences in quantities or prices.
Introduction of the target cost
The cost target is introduced into the layout estimate and purpose
of the windows of the estimate, which is parallel to the revenue estimate. The production costs are in the fields with the Tgt prefix.
Presto in the planning stage 99

You can quickly create the target from the estimate by PROCESS:
Generate target option.
Income
In private work, the estimate directly represents the net income corresponding to its execution.
In public works, if defined indirect cost percentages and other additional costs, revenues used in the comparisons should include these
values.
Relations.AmntEstAdj
Award amount, consisting of the estimate plus the usual percentages
in public works.
.AmntTgtEst
Total planned production or the total expected income. It is calculated as the target quantity valued at estimate price. Used to calculate
incomes when the target quantity is different from the estimate.
.AmntTgtEstAdj
Planned total production including overhead percentages of public
works.
Cost
In amounts corresponding to the target cost, the program does not
apply indirect costs and other additional costs.
Indirect costs and other expenses attributable to the project, which do
not correspond to certifiable concepts, can be incorporated into specific chapters of the target and is convenient assign it the Indirect
costs category.
.AmntTgt
Expected final cost or amount of the target.
Comparison between income and cost
The difference between the sales price and the cost represents the
margin or profit earned on each concept.
Margin
It calculates the difference between expected production and cost
target.
Generate target
It lets generate the target cost from the estimate or vice versa, changing the prices of marked natures.
100 Manual de Presto manual

It can be applied to the entire project or just the chosen concept inferior concepts, showing the reference current value, from which the
changes are made in prices.
The quantities are copied from the pricing structure of origin to destination:
Quantity
Work items
and breakdown
Quantities

Behaviour
Are always copied.

In the work items are copied as indicated in the option.

When generating the target, stage 1 of planning is assigned to the


estimate approved take-off lines.
While generating the estimate, the state Initial estimate (black) to
take-off lines with planning stage is assigned. Neither the chapters
with category Indirect costs are copied.
Update target decomposition
It replaces selected prices target price decompositions by the existing
ones for these same work item in the reference or selected price table.
Do not alter the target prices of concepts that already exist in the estimate. If the work item does not have decomposition in the reference, directly copies the target price.
This option does not alter neither the breakdown nor the estimate
price.
Restructure target decomposition
It eliminates or consolidates by natures the concepts of target decomposition of selected work items. You can also group into one all
consolidated concepts, with an identical text to which the work item it
belongs.
In each selected work item it adds the amount of selected nature and
creates a new inferior:

The new code is formed from the initials of the merged concepts that match up, to three, plus the code of the work item.
The summary is the nature, plus the name of the work item.

If the new concept exists, the amount is set and the description is not
altered.
Presto in the planning stage 101

Consolidate work items


It consolidates the selected work items into a single concept. The
structure and estimate prices of the original work items are not altered and not act on awarded contracts.
The take-off lines are not consolidated, since they correspond to units
of measurement and different prices. The resulting work item can
have in its decomposition the consolidated work items, with its measurement and target price of the original estimate.
In addition you can perform the following actions:
Cancel target on source data
The new work item has quantities and target prices, and in the original work items the quantities of target and planning are cancelled.
Add to bar chart
The work item appears on the Gantt chart and the original are fold.
Convert to supply
The new work item is bought or subcontracted.
Break down work items by activity
It separates a work item in another, each of which contains the takeoff lines assigned to each activity, in order to plan, contract them or
execute them separately.
The work items generated for each activity, in turn, can be optionally
merge into one.
The applied options to the created work items are described in Consolidate work items option.
Break down work items by decomposition
This option lets separate a work item in two or more, that be executed, planned or contracted separately.
To do this, it generates a work item from another, inserting in its target decomposition the difference in yields between estimate and target of each of their inferiors, so are two work items whose targets are
complementary of the original unit.
The applied options to the created work items are described in Consolidate work items option.
To view in parallel and easily modify the estimate and target yields,
you can use the scheme Estimate and target.

102 Manual de Presto manual

Features of the new work item:


The code is formed by adding a numeric suffix.

The summary is the same as the original.

The quantity in the target equals to the original work item.

The quantity in the estimate is zero.

Fill economic planning


Target quantities are introduced similar to the certification:
Overall for the work item, the QtyTgt field.

Estimated disaggregated implementing the QtyPlan field of


each phase, which can be seen in multiple fields to the right
phase.

Broken down in take-off lines, associating to each line the


planning stage for its estimated execution.

The sum of the quantities for all stages is the target.


Economic planning is to accrue the target cost.
Planning is called the sum to the current certification at all times,
which can be compared well with certified or actual execution.
The distribution of quantities by stages can be performed automatically using this option, which fills the quantities of planning by stages
of the work items, erasing the existing planning.
In cases where the quantity is small and the period of distribution is
large, schedules are obtained with very small quantities or fractions,
which are standardized in the last certification to match with the intended target.
If the calculation precision is increased, the setting will be better.
See also Purchasing and subcontracting: Calculate resources.
Options to fill the planning:
Using bar chart data
It takes data from the technical planning of the Gantt chart.
It divides the target quantity in each work item in stages corresponding to the estimated start and end dates of the work item, depending
on labour days involved.
Applying planning weights from each certification
It divide the target between different certifications, applying a coefficient or weight to each, thus obtaining the expenses theoretical planning.
Presto in the planning stage 103

The weight that each certification has in the planning, is introduced in


the dates window, where the user can indicate the fitted values to
their experience or use the suggested values. A file is delivered in Excel format with various models of distribution curves for planning
costs, from where you can copy different values of weights.
Fields that lets the planning by certifications are in the Dates window, Planning layout, and are:
Diary.WeightPlan
Part of the costs target that is estimated to perform on the stage, or
certification.
The suggest button has several alternatives:

Weight distributed linearly.

Pendant weight, up to 100.

Estimated weight to form a Gaussian curve.


These options take into account the number of existing certifications
in the project; add or remove the necessary for proper distribution.
.OrWeightPlan
Accumulated weight until certification.
.PlanTheor
Amount of the theoretical planning by weight of certification.
.OrPlanTheor
Accumulated theoretical planning until certification.
Applying to the work items the planning of the activities
Divide the target for activities, using the earliest possible dates or late,
ASAP and ALAP dates respectively.
It applies to the work items having all the objective take-off lines with
activities. From the total target, the amount corresponding to each
phase based on the estimated diagram for activities stuffed dates.
Result in a take-off lines for each different stage and planned activity,
which is not included in the estimate is added. If the result exactly
matches an existing line take-off lines, the planning stage match
without creating a new line is entered.
Check Presto in the planning stage: Temporary planning: Amounts by
stages depending on the ASAP-ALAP dates.

104 Manual de Presto manual

Results of economic planning


Reports of the group 03 Economic planning:
Estimate and target
Comparison of income and costs. It takes into account indirect costs,
overhead, profit industrial and low auction.
Target summary
Same as above, but by chapters.
Revenue and cost planning
Project planned work items grouped by stages or months, and compare expected revenues and costs in each stage.
Chapters and work item with stages
Chapters and work items with the stages of certification, execution
and planning.
Quantities or amounts by months
Chapters and work items with the quantities or amounts by months.

Financial planning
The system is based in the creation of previsional invoices and their
maturities, from:

Revenues, calculated from the planning or certifications.


Expenses, calculated from the planning or contracts.

As a result of the balance of the respective maturities, daily cash flow


is obtained.
Create invoices
This menu option PROCESS creates pension bills for all phases of
execution of the work, or the current certification.
Check Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Documents of
economic control.
With each invoice also are created maturities, including those corresponding to withholding and taxes, depending on the payment
methods associated to the supplier or customer.
The process removes existing previsional invoices. To convert invoices
into definitive associate the black state.
In the options that associates the invoice to the developer or builder
takes the first by order of code, if more than one.
Presto in the planning stage 105

The Document field of the invoice is formed by adding the AccSuppliers field of the entity associated to the invoice.
Concepts.Supplier
On concepts used in this process to assign a certain income or expense to a developer or builder, different from that in the work.
All stages
With these options, invoices are generated for all stages that have
quantities, and let:

Make a planning of income and expenses from the available


data, such as economic planning, certification or contracting.
Obtain the cash flow of the project.

Income (from the planning estimate price


It represents the amount of certifications according to the planning.
It is calculated based on economic planning, valued at estimate price,
including the percentage of cost overrun as indirect, industrial profits,
overhead, and low auction.
Invoices are assigned to the developer.
Income (from the certifications)
It represents the amount of the certifications.
Are calculated as above, depending on the certification.
Invoices are assigned to Developer, except if in the work item Supplier field is another Developer or User, which is assigned to
them.
Expenses (from planning)
It represents the expenses associated to the execution of the project.
It is calculated based on economic planning, gathering the necessary
concepts for execution by stages and supplier.
Invoices are assigned to Contractor, except if in the concept Supplier field is any, which is assigned to it.
Expenses (from contract)
It represents expenses associated with hiring or purchasing management.
In awarded contracts, are calculated and associated under the conditions of the contract.
In non- award contracts, are calculated to price target and are associated to the constructor.
106 Manual de Presto manual

Current stage
An invoice for the actual certification is generated.
Its used to send isolated certifications to the developer, or to send
preform invoices to suppliers contained in awarded contracts.
Certification to the promoter
It invoices to the developer, with the work items of the current certification to the estimate price and their overrun percentages.
Associated suppliers, to the contract price
Invoices for each subcontractor listed in the Supplier field of the
work items, with the certified or actual quantity of the current stage,
to the contracted price.
Subcontractors invoices
Supplier
Regular
Regular

Breakdown* Quantity to be transferred to the invoice


Yes
Quantity of the approved stage.
No
Total quantity minus the sum of the invoiced
quantities of the work item to the same supplier.
Cumulative Yes
Sum of the quantities to the current certification.
Cumulative No
Total quantity.
* Has quantities in stages or take-off lines
Results of financial planning
Results can be viewed at:
Window
Invoices
Maturities
Dates
Dates
Diary
Diary

Layout
Suppliers, customers
Month: Invoices
Month: Receipts and payments
Invoices
Receipts and payments

Finance cost (Dates: Months)


Expression that calculates the interests from cash flow and % interest
or rate. This expression can be included in a user column of the window and layout described therein.
The rate should be entered in VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous.
Presto in the planning stage 107

Temporary planning
Presto temporal planning system includes numerous specific resources for construction.
Temporary planning requires the following steps:
1 Set deadlines and dates of the work, and calculation conditions.
2 Select the tasks and their behaviour.
3 Determine the duration of tasks.
4 Situate the tasks in time.
Gantt chart
The hierarchical structure of the bar chart is the same estimate, although the concepts are in again and may be different.
In this context, the items shown in the diagram are called tasks, and
their number is limited to one thousand. The basic natures never appear in the diagram.
Tasks listing
This window has basically the same functionality as the diagram. The
difference is that the tasks are not hierarchically, but as a list, and bear
masks on the code.
Display options: Lists
The windows of bars have drop-down lists to select the types of tasks,
schedules and fields to be displayed in the graph area.
Task filter
In the Gantt chart to select the type of tasks to display. They can be
opened and closed manually levels as any hierarchical window.
Layouts
Different combinations to display dates of all types, lengths and gaps.
Fields to display next to each bar
Choose fields to display on each task bar. The fields are table Relationships and user defined in the diagrams window bars.
Fields to display by stages
Choose fields to display on each task and phase. The selectable fields
are the Stages table, and the user are defined in the subordinate
window Stages layout Certification.

108 Manual de Presto manual

Icons: Bars and graphic elements


Display bar chart
It displays or hides the graphic to the right of the window.
Increase scale | Decrease scale
It modifies the timescale to view details for days, weeks, months,
years or stages.
Display planned dates
It enables or disables the display of the ASAP bars. The colour of
summary tasks type is taken from the appearance options defined for
chapters, and the tasks one is taken from the defined activities. Those
take the superior date include a green line at the beginning and at
the end of the bar.
ALAP
Enables or disables the display of the ALAP bars. The overlap region
of the bars of the ASAP and ALAP tasks is painted darker colour.
Grayscale
Change colors of the ASAP and ALAP bars for better printing in black
and white.
View clearances
It enables or disables the display of clearances bars.
Display real dates
It enables or disables the display of actual dates bars.
Links
It enables or disables the display of the arrows on the precedence
between tasks.
Precedences
Shows or hides the sub window of the same name, which is the type
of link and the overlaps.
State type tasks
It enables or disables the display of the days in which there has been
a change of state in tasks.
Dates
In the diagram the following special dates are marked:

Presto in the planning stage 109

Dates
Color
From the start of the work until the current certifica- Yellow background
tion
(*)
Among the current certification and the last defined White background
stage or date of completion of the work
Other cases
grey background
Holidays
Vertical red line
Final date of approved certifications
Vertical black line
(**)
End date of current certification
Vertical green line
(**)
(*) It takes the background colour for protected columns
(**) Appear if a field is selected phases in the list
Depending on the scale applied at all times, may be other lines-guide
points that facilitate the location of task-date
Aids
A track on each bar shows your description, duration and dates.
Center bar
On any field of a task, position the Gantt chart from the beginning of
the chosen task bar.
Planning
Most global variables involved in the planning and their calculations
are defined in VIEW: Project settings: Planning.
Hours per labour day
Labour days per month
It let adjusting the calculations of durations and times.
Simultaneity factor for activities
It indicates the proportion to which each task overlap with other tasks
for the calculation of the durations by cost.
Category
Functional typology, defined in Project settings: Data, which affects
the estimate of the period of the project.
Works duration in months
It affects the calculation of durations based in costs.

110 Manual de Presto manual

The suggest box of this field provides an estimate of the period according to the model described in Predicting Construction Duration
of Building Project, developed by Joe Martin, Theresa Keoughan Burrows and Ian Pegg.
The data have been adapted to the conditions of construction in
Spain from real projects compiled by Presto.
The result depends on the estimate amount and the type of project.
DateEstimate: Date of estimate
Is assigned to the Date field of the newly created concepts and it is
the initial reference date to calculate the IPC for each concept.
DateContract: Contract date
Award date, reference to the start of the repricing.
DateLicense: Date License
Date of obtaining of works permission.
DatIniWork: Date of start of the work
It indicates the beginning of the bar chart display.
DateWorkEnd: Date of completion of the works
It affects to the end of the Gantt chart display and to maturities of
warranty withholding.
Selection of tasks and behaviour
Unplanned task
It excludes the task of Gantt graph and is equivalent to cancel the
DurTot field.
The tasks excluded may be again included using the filter All, or
from the estimate windows, unannullating the DurTot field.
Relations.NullDurTot
Equals 1 if the DurTot field is cancelled.
.TypeDurTot
Vale 3 if the DurTot field is calculated (magenta).
Behaviours or types of tasks
The behaviour of each task is assigned by menu options windows
estimates and bar chart.

Presto in the planning stage 111

Behaviour
Rate job summary

Meaning
Their dates contains those of
their inferior concepts.
Calculated dates
They have their own duration
and their dates depend on
their precedencies with other
tasks.
Dates from superior Are adapted dates and duration of its superior concept.

Value Type
4
Chapters
(trades)
0
Work items
Activities
Contracts
3

Operations
Control
type concepts
Value: Fields TypeDateIPlan and TypeDateFPlan table Relationships.
Type: Nature of the concept and behaviour assigned by default.
Planning can be altered by changing the behaviours as desired, with
the following restrictions:

Summary type tasks should have some inferior task with calculated dates.

Not are shown calculated tasks that be inferiors to another


calculated tasks.

Special behaviours
You can force the content of the dates regardless of the task type.
Blocked date
The user sets the date manually and does not account for the calculations.
If you move the full bar graph, the start date is set.
If you move the right end of the bar, the duration is changed.
The locked date is deleted by selecting one of the types of task.
Relations.TypeDateIPlan
This field contains the value that corresponds to the behaviour or way
of calculating dates.
It equals 1 if the date is locked.
Date unlocked
The user unlocks the date is calculated based on the precedencies.
Concepts.DurUnit
Concept unit duration in hours. It is calculated based on the target
cost, and if not, is calculated based on the estimate.
112 Manual de Presto manual

Duration of tasks
The time duration represents an effort measured in days of work,
while the cost duration represents the reasonable total term of execution of the task.
Fields involved in these calculations are usually seen in the Durations layout of the Gantt chart.
Relations.DurTot
Duration of task execution in days. Its a property of the relationship
between the concept and the superior, so that a task in more than
one superior concept has several total durations.
You only need to enter task durations with end date of calculated
type, i.e., based on the precedencies.
This field fills each user, and the Suggest button provides two large
groups of estimated values: those calculated from the target and calculated from the estimate.
In general, the estimates described below, any mention of the lens is
also applicable to the estimate.
Estimates of the duration by time
.DurTgtTmp
Estimation based on the task daily production, total production, taken
from the target quantity in the parent, and the number of teams in
their relationship.
.Equipment
Number of equipment / manpower working simultaneously on task
during the execution of the above concept elements.
The suggest button indicates the number of equipment needed to
perform the task in the total period, calculated from the duration by
time and cost.
.ProdDay
Daily production of the task in execution of the superior concept.
Presto suggests the likely values, depending on the income of the
inferior concepts that match the following conditions:

Its nature is equipment or manpower.

The unit of measurement is comparable to hours. Just the unit


starts with h or H.

Presto in the planning stage 113

Its calculated as the inverse of the yield of each of the inferiors, multiplied by the number of equipments allocated to the relation, divided by the difficulty of the superior and converted to days. The daily
production by default is the smaller of these results, rounded.
Estimations of the duration by cost
They are based on the ratio of the total period of the work displayed
on Project settings: Times., And the target relative cost between task
to total work
.DurTgt
Estimate based on the total target cost of any task, including the concepts of contract type and activity. It is calculated based on the term
of the work, the relative cost of the task and the coincidence factor
described below.
.DurTgtRec
Estimate based on the proportion of the cost of the resources of
manpower and equipment the task for the whole work.
Requires that the task has lower concepts of these natures.
Task concurrency
To obtain an accurate estimation of the cost duration there is to estimate the number of simultaneous tasks. For example, assuming that
on average two tasks are performed simultaneously, the duration can
be twice that obtained in proportion to the cost.
Presto has a unique mathematical model to estimate the number of
simultaneous tasks. This number is proportional to the project number of tasks, since in a larger project more operations are performed
at the same time, and is inversely proportional to the relative cost of
each task, as weighty tasks in the project tend to be made with more
efficiency and resources.
The number of concurrent tasks, which can vary between one and the
total number of tasks, can be set between these extremes by a coefficient that is introduced in VIEW: Project settings: Planning.

0 indicates not simultaneous tasks and therefore its duration is


the minimum possible, with the cost obtained.

The value 1 indicates that all tasks are executed at the time
and therefore last as long as the project.

114 Manual de Presto manual

The sum of durations of all tasks will be longer than the duration of
the project, except that the simultaneity coefficient is zero. The adjustment to the actual conditions will be made by precedence relations.
Relations between tasks: Precedence
For obtaining dates is necessary enter precedence relations between
tasks of calculated dates. In Gantt chart Precedence subordinate
window are edited.
The links can be created graphically by dragging the predecessor over
the successor task, as the style of Microsoft Project.
The graph of the diagram, the [Tab] key moves successively between
different links.
By establishing a precedence of tasks with blocked dates, do not suffer any change. The user must decide to unlock them or not.
Double clicking on a link to filter the corresponding links.
To delete a precedence, check the link and press [Delete].
Precedencies.Type
The following linking types are supported:
Link
End-Start

Meaning
The successor can start if
the predecessor ends.

Creation
Final of the predecessor
over the initiation of the
successor.
Start-Start
The successor cannot start Starting the predecessor
before the predecessor.
over the begin of the successor.
End-End
The successor cannot finish Final of the predecesbefore the predecessor.
sor over the end of the
successor.
Start-Start
Double link, which comBegin of the predecessor
End-End
bines the above two types. over the end of the successor.
Invalid links are black
.CodAntecesor |.CodSucesor
Codes of concepts predecessor and successor, respectively.
.ResAntecesor |.ResSucesor
Summary of the concepts predecessor and successor, respectively.

Presto in the planning stage 115

.Overlap
The overlap indicates the number of working days in the beginning or
end of the successor task is separated from the beginning or end of
the predecessor. Depending on the type of bond, the overlap can be
front, rear or combined. The part of a link that corresponds to overlap
is represented by the arrow thicker.
.OverlapAfter
Is overlap of End-End type at the double link.
.Critical
0: Not critical
1: Ahead
2: Behind
3: Both
4: Error
Create precedence
Create successive links between the selected tasks.
The following conditions must be met:

The two tasks must be the same type of concept.

The closing date for the predecessor must be calculated.


The initial date of the successor must be calculated and must
not have predecessors.

You can create precedencies over:


The selected tasks, creating successive links between them,
even over all the tasks of the project.

On the active task, choosing predecessor, successor, or both.

Date calculations
If automatic price calculation is enabled, the start and end dates of
the tasks are calculated based on the durations and links, every time
there is a change that affects them. Otherwise, select
CALCULATIONS: Time planning.
The start date of tasks without predecessors is the start of the project.
The closing date for each task is the day after completion.
A zero duration task has the same start and end dates.
If impossible restrictions are detected, for example, if a fixed date requires to start a task before its predecessor, its link is olive green.
116 Manual de Presto manual

Start
DateIPlan
DayIPlan

End
Meaning
DateEPlan Earliest possible date: ASAP
DayEPlan Consecutive number of working day since the
start of the work, applied to dates ASAP.
DateLITotal DateLETotal Latest possible dates without affecting the end
of the project: ALAP
DayIUTotal DayFUTotal Consecutive number of working day since the
start of the work, applied to dates ALAP.
DateIReal DateEReal Actual dates.
Fields of the Relations table
The ASAP-ALAP dates are used to calculate different amounts by
stages, as described below.
Relations.TypeDateIReal | .TypeDateFReal
They have value 3 when the dates are calculated (magenta).
Advances
Percentage
Meaning
PerDatePlan
Percentage elapsed on the planned duration.
PerDateRealPlan Percentage of real execution elapsed over the real duration.
Fields of the Relations table
View clearances
The clearances are days that can be delayed / advanced tasks.
Clearance
ClearanceInit
ClearanceAfter
ClearanceTotal

Bar
No
No
Green
clear

Meaning
Available time to start a task.
Available time to complete a task.
Days that the task can be delayed or increase its
duration without affecting the end of the work.
It is the sum of the previous three clearances.
ClearanceFree Green Days that the task can be delayed or increase its
duration without affecting other tasks.
ClearanceInbe- Green Days that can interrupt the task or increase its
tween
duration. If the value is negative indicates the
slippage that can have the whole of the task in
its realization.
ClearanceDur
Grey The task supports a longer duration, but if the
start is delayed affects other tasks.

Presto in the planning stage 117

Clearance
Clearance

Bar

Meaning
The work item duration is different from the
number of days between their start and end
dates.
Green If lower, indicating downtime, is positive and is
depicted in the interior of the bar.
Red If lower, indicating downtime, is positive and is
depicted in the interior of the bar.
Fields of the Relations table
The tasks whose duration is less than the difference between the start
and end dates are in the first start date and the difference is represented as intermediate clearance, which is called breaking tasks. This
case is the usual tasks where the successor double bond is shorter
than the predecessor, as can occur with plastering and painting.
Critical path
A task is critical if not total float or have slack time (gray) and his successor is critical.
It is displayed by red links.
Amounts by stages depending on the dates ASAP-ALAP
They are based on the duration tasks in each stage, and can be seen
in the windows of the stages or in the Gantt chart.
Stages.PerASAP
Percentage of activity corresponding to the stage according to dates
DateIPlan and DateFPlan.
.OrPerASAP
Percentage of origin of the activity corresponding to the stage given
dates DateIPlan and DateFPlan.
.PerALAP
Percentage of activity corresponding to the stage according to the
dates DateIUTotal and DateFUTotal.
.OrPerALAP
Percentage of origin of the activity corresponding to the stage given
dates DateIUTotal and DateFUTotal.

118 Manual de Presto manual

.EstASAP | .TgtASAP | .TgtEstASAP


Estimate amounts, target and estimated total production, corresponding to the percentage of the activity according to the earliest dates,
contained in PerASAP.
.EstALAP | .TgtALAP | .TgtEstALAP
Estimate amounts, target and estimated total production, corresponding to the percentage of the activity according to the later date, given
in PerALAP.
Calculation of amounts
For fields relating to amounts are calculated, must be checked the
Automatic price recalculation option.
In terms of work items and activities, is calculated based on the percentages of each type.
A chapters level, are calculated as the sum of the amounts of lower
concepts.
Results of temporal planning
Reports of the group 04 Temporary Planning:
Gantt chart
Its recommended to generate the complete diagram and export it to
PDF with the Paper size: Entire document option, where you easily
manages the printing on printers of different sizes.
Precedences
Tasks of type summary, calculated, associated to the superior or
planned, with their precedencies.
Tasks and resources
Tasks of type summary, calculated, associated to the superior or
planned, with their resources.

Primavera and Project link


Presto has several connection options with these programs.

Import to Presto a Primavera project. Refer Primavera section.

Assigning to the work items of an estimate the planning or the


certifications made on a Primavera planning, but do not match
either the structure or the encoding used. Refer to paragraph
Integrating the planning and certification of Primavera.
Presto in the planning stage 119

Export an estimate of Presto to Microsoft Project or Primavera.


Refer to Primavera XML section.

Primavera
FILE: Import option inserts into a Presto estimate one XER file generated by Primavera.
Content of XER file is added to the estimate, so in general, it is desirable start from an estimate without content. If the XER file contains
specified information of several projects, you have to choose the appropriate node to import.
The chapters and subchapters are taken from the WBS components
(WBS).
The activities become concepts of type Work item or Activity, according to your choice.
The resources are associated to their work items, classified as Manpower (manpower), Equipment (No manpower) and Materials
(Materials). Costs (Expenses) are assigned to Others nature.
The concepts code is formed with an identifier of the XER file that
guarantees the exact correspondence between the estimate and the
planning. Visible codes in Primavera are stored in Code2.
The type of activity is stored in the Group field and is identified by
colors:
Red: Begin milestones.

Green: end milestones.


Gray: Activities of type description.

Financial periods become stages. Its assigned as approved stage


which corresponds to the Data date of Primavera.
If there is an advance by percentage, is stored in the Relations.PerAdvance with the content of phys_complete_pct Primavera
field.
It also reads the start date of the project, the price of manpower
hours and the working hours of the day.
After the importation, prices and times are recalculated, if activated
the automatic calculation of prices.
Import only cost activities
This option only imports activities with non-zero price.

120 Manual de Presto manual

Import as Activity type concepts


It let importing activities from Primavera as concepts of type Work
item or Activity.
Temporary planning
While importing planning, it overwrites the data for the selected option in each case:
If there are equal precedencies are deleted, and new are created.

If there are dates of beginning, of end and durations, are updated.

If the dates of begin and end options are marked, or target


dates, real dates begin and end are updated.

Options for importing planning:


Durations and precedence
It imports the original data, in order to modify and recalculate with
Presto. It is possible that differences due in Primavera is possible
using multiple calendars, and the use of other criteria.
Links Begin - End are not imported, but the double links BeginBegin/End-End.
Start and end dates
Start and end dates, early and late, provided by Primavera. Dates are
left locked so that they can be used without modifications. Primavera
does not provide the dates from today (Data date), so in an initiated
work the target dates should be used.
Target dates
Original estimates (target) of the start and end date provided by Primavera, which are maintained even if the project is started.
Primavera XML
With this option of FILE: Export a file is created in XML format, with
the structure of chapters and work items, resources, activities and
temporarily planning.
Before importing with Primavera the Presto generated files, check the
Resource Initials option is activated, which is in Import: Template,
Resources tab.

Presto in the planning stage 121

Microsoft Project
With this FILE: Export option a file in Project format is created, with
the structure of chapters and work items, resources classified in materials and manpower, durations, total hours of manpower resource
type, the precedence, the calculated dates of beginning and end of
the planning, and the executed percentage, taken from the certification.

122 Manual de Presto manual

Presto in project management


This chapter describes the processes that occur during the execution
from the point of view of the director of execution or the project
manager:

Tender offers for complete projects.


Certifications.

Track cost.
The earned value (EVM) for the construction manager described in
Service request from Presto website, under Certifications.

Tender bid for complete work


This system compares the received bids on a basis estimate, applying
to their measurements the different prices received for the work
items. No adjustment is made.
The general process described in Presto at the stage of project: An
information system: Comparison of multiple prices.
The entire process of comparing bids is:
Request offers to different bidders
There are several ways to ask for price to bidders:

Send a Presto project without prices and without decomposition.

From previous project, export to Excel, selecting the level of


Chapters and work items.

On paper, with the report Estimates and take-off lines, without prices.

Receive the bids


Bidders fill prices and return the offer, which is incorporated to Presto
as the format received:
If it is a Presto project, by FILE: Import: Offers.

If is a bid in Excel by FILE: Import: Excel.

If it is on paper, you must perform the manual process of creating an entity of Bidder type, and type the prices in the layout of bids comparison of the estimates window.

Compare the bids


You can review in the layout of comparing bids, or on paper.
Presto in project management 123

The reports show the lowest bids in green, which facilitates their analysis, and are in the report group 05 Certifications:
Compared offers in horizontal
Compared offers in vertical
These reports show the structure of the estimate and prices offered
by each of the suppliers, the paper orientation indicated on each.
Update the estimate prices with the successful tender
The bids prices can be copied and pasted into the price that is right
for its interpretation, either the estimate or the target.

The certification
Certification is the process by which quantifies and approves the
measurement of each work item in a given period for payment to the
contractor.
Are only certifiable items that are under a chapter.
The certification amount is calculated using the estimate unitary price
to the cumulative certified quantity, or to the sum of certified quantities in approved stages.
Stages or certifications
They are periods of time between the days marked as Certification
on the dates windows, and generally are months.
The stages allow accrued analysis of different types of information,
such as economic planning, execution and production.
The certified quantities can be entered:
1. No breakdown, writing the quantity certified from the origin
In the estimate windows, Certification layout, directly typing the
quantity in the work item.
Relations.QtyCert | AmntCert
Certified quantity of work item and amount, respectively. It can be
calculated from stages and take-off lines.
2. Breakdown by certifications, stages or months
In the estimate windows, type-certification layouts, which are those
activate the Multiple fields icon. To display certifications from a
specified number, select the number in the Stage dropdown list.

124 Manual de Presto manual

Stages.QtyCert | Cert
Certified quantity in the stage and amount, respectively. It can be calculated from take-off lines
3. Breakdown by detail take-off lines
In estimate windows, subordinate window Take-off lines, Estimate
and certification layout.
For the rest of pricing structures similar resources are used.
TakeOff.StageCert
It is the field that represents the number of certification or stage.
To certify take-off lines must fill this field with the stage number in
which each certified. The drop-down list containing existing certifications in a logical order can be used.
To certify independent take-off lines of the estimate, you have to uncheck the Est fields of the window, to prevent new lines are included
in the estimate.
Not alter the data entered in previous certifications
To not modify the values of the take-off lines and the prior certifications to the current stage, there is a user option that greatly restricts
those changes.
Refer to FILE: Working environment: General: Lock editing of approved certifications.
Create dates and certifications
This PROCESS menu option lets you to create stages or certifications, and add to the diary the days between two dates, but does not
delete or alter existing certification dates.
The Default button takes as its starting day the last day of the
month following the last existing stage; if not certifications, making
the start date of the work. The number of months it takes the term of
the work. The above data are the properties of the work on time.
If you do not want to create certifications enter a 0 in Day of certification.
The result is seen in the Dates window in the stages layout.
In order to stages match to the months, is assigned as certification
day the last day of each month. Still, two complementary results are
obtained, since the months are added by annuities that you see in the
Diary window, and certifications are for the total project.
Presto in project management 125

To create isolated certifications or with other periods, you must first


create the dates, for which you can use the same option above, and
then check the end date of each stage as Certification.
Certification is also created to assign a take-off line to the next available number.
Stages.Certification
The certifications are numbered consecutively and the take-off lines
are associated to the number, not the date.
Stages.Date | Diary.DateDMA
Date of certification or stage of the stages and dates windows, respectively.
Changing certifications
In the Dates and Diary windows, you can delete the stages deleting the rows, provided they have not associated data.
In the estimate windows, are eliminated by the choice Clear stage
on the head in one of multiple fields.
In both cases the later stages are automatically renumbered.
Not a certification day
For a date stops be of certification is assigned as Not a certification
day. The associated data to that stage and all subsequent move to
the next stage. Therefore, to remove a day certification with data,
must exist at least one free day of certification to the end, without
data.
Certification
If its assigned a date as Certification between two existing ones, the
associated data to the latest stages moves forward one stage and the
last certification remains without data.
Change the date of certification
Select first the new date as
other date

Certification and then convert the

No certification.

Remove certified quantities in stages


In VIEW: Activities and certifications, Certifications: Certification
layout, you can select the QtyCert column the certifications to remove:

All, selecting the entire column in the header.

126 Manual de Presto manual

A group of cells, by selecting a range of fields.

A certification number, filtering by content on the number of


certification to remove, and selecting the filtered column.

Removing the selected information by pressing [Delete].


Assigning the current certification
It can make a certification as current using the context menu:
Window
Dates, Stages: layout
Estimate
Tree
Stages, subordinate of the
estimate windows

Paragraph
On certification to be approved.
Add a multi field of stages, on the header
of the certification to approve.
On certification to be approved.

Current certification
Its one of the most important data in project management, because
it returns the status of the project on a certain date or period. Depending on the type of open window, the field indicating the number,
date, quantity or certification amount is seen in a different colour.
Diary.State
The phases can be divided into various states of approval, which significantly influence many calculations by Presto.
Stage or certification
Approved

Value Meaning

Current certification

Stages previous to current, all approved.


Last stage approval or certification.

Pending

After the current stage, all unapproved.

The quantities and the amounts of different pricing structures are


available disaggregated by these states, and are in the fields of the
table Relations whose suffixes are Ant and Act, for example:
Relations.QtyCertAnt | AmntCertAnt
Certified quantity in the previous certifications to current.
Relations.QtyCertAct | AmntCertAct
Certified quantity in the current stage or certification.
Presto in project management 127

Official certifications
In official work, to the total amount obtained for the project, which
already includes indirect costs, are applied the same percentages that
convert the PEM in the awarding estimate. To this total amount cumulative (to source) is discounted the equivalent amount of the previous certification.
Price revision
The price revision is the correction of the amount of each certification
to take in account the prices increases from the award date. Presto
can apply the normative for public works or recommendations for
private work.
The prices revision coefficient can be calculated by an Excel sheet
supplied with the program, which can automatically read from the
open project the two dates of reference for calculating: the award of
the contract date and the current certification.
The sheet contains the polynomial formulas Spanish legislation and
official inflation indexes, materials and manpower published to date.
The sheet is open, so you can review, modify or supplement to adapt
it to any other form of calculation, rule or custom.
Stages: Repricing
This layout of Dates window shows the amounts required to submit
a certificate in public works.
To facilitate the application of the price revision, Presto also shows in
table header two data:

The date of the contract or award of the project.


20% of the estimate, which is not usually applied the revision.

The program always applies the introduced revision coefficient, and


must be included the unit in the stages where should not be applied.
The layout includes the following fields:
Diary.Cert
Amount of current certification referred to PEM, including direct and
indirect costs.
.OrCert
As above, but cumulative to origin.
.Accredited
Month credited amount, applying to the certification the percentages
of structure expenses and award coefficient.
128 Manual de Presto manual

.OrOfficial
As above, but cumulative to origin.
.Kt
Coefficient review entered by the user prices. It can be calculated with
the book Excel mentioned above, and may vary depending on the
type of work to be certified.
.Review
Amount of price revision, using the Kt.
.Num
A free field to add an additional amount.
.Cash
Net amount, sum of the above, without tax.
Results of certification
Reports of the group 05 Certifications:
Certification with take-off lines
Typical certification model with multiple combinations to see whether
or not the take-off lines, texts, prices, current certification data, and a
summary for each chapter and work item.
Summary certification
Chapters include expenses, profit, low auction and taxes.
Quantities and amounts of a certification
Value of work items certified in one stage, month or certification.
Current and cumulative certification
List of certified work items, disaggregating the values corresponding
to the current or approved certification, previous to the current, and
total up the current.
Summary of current certification and cumulative
Chapters disaggregated by current or approved certification, prior to
the current, and the totals up the current.
Comparison of quantities up to the present stage
Compare different pricing structures and other combinations.
Table of new prices
Work items that do not have quantity in the initial estimate are considered, but are executed and collected, i.e., are certified.

Presto in project management 129

Certification invoice
Invoice model that represents the current certification.
Liquidation of the certification
Settlement model used by many governments.
Valued relationship
Certification model used by many governments.

Cost tracking
In this section the economic control system is described from the
point of view of the works director or project manager, based solely
on the information contained in the estimate and certifications.
The project management has two goals:

Track changes arising throughout the project.


Estimate the actual progress and expected final cost.

When certification is globally introduced for the work item, by stages


or specific take-off lines, estimate independent, you only have information of two values: the total estimate and the current certification.
The comparison between them is only significant if the project to be
executed is exactly what is described in the project.
The use of approval states in the take-off lines, allows for comparisons that add useful criteria for a more advanced tracking.
Check Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Measurement by
statements of approval.
Estimate by approval states
When take-off lines with approval statuses are used, the estimate
amounts disaggregated by each are obtained, and are in the Estimate by statuses layout of the windows:
Estimate.

Activities.

Subordinated Activities.

[Concepts | Stages].Est
The price that contains the take-off lines of the initial estimate and
the approved changes, or current estimate.
.EstIni
Part of the price corresponding to the take-off lines of the initial estimate.
130 Manual de Presto manual

.EstMod
Part of the price corresponding to take-off lines associated with approved changes in the estimate.
.EstPend
Part of the price of the concept that corresponds to the take-off lines
associated to changes of the estimate, pending of approval.
Relations.QtyEstIni | .QtyEstMod | .QtyEstPend
Quantity corresponding to the take-off lines allocated to each state.
.AmntEstIni | .AmntEstMod | .AmntEstPend
Amount that corresponds to the take-off lines allocated to each state.
.AmntEstPossible
The possible estimate, which is the current estimate plus the estimate
pending of approval.
Certification by approval states
To certify an existing take-off line in the initial estimate, just have to
associate it to the corresponding stage.
The quantities does not correspond to the initial estimate for
the project are introduced into new take-off lines, associated
to red (pendent) or green (approved ) status, depending on its
situation.

When the certified quantities correspond to the estimate, but


have not direct correspondence with their take-off lines, specific lines of certification are created with the Est field unchecked, is order not to alter the estimate.

If a part of the estimate not to be executed, the change is introduced by a line with a negative sign, in the green state.

You can unfold an estimate take-off line to certify one part and let the
another pending.
The disaggregated amounts represent the portion of that certification
corresponding to each approval status, and are seen in the Certification by statuses layout contained in the main windows of estimates,
activities, and in Stages subordinate one.
[Concepts | Stages] .CertIni |.CertMod |.CertPend
Part of the price corresponding to the certified take-off lines for each
state.

Presto in project management 131

Relations.QtyCertIni | .QtyCertMod | .QtyCertPend


Number of certified take-off lines for each state.
.AmntCertIni | .AmntCertMod | .AmntCertPend
Take-off lines amount certified for each state.
Comparisons between estimate and certification by approval states
The estimate comparison, the certification and the pending part in
each state of approval, gives a good tool to know the project state.
You can compare, for example:

Certification in black state, which corresponds to the original


project, with the initial estimate.
The approved certification, in status in black and green, with
the current estimate.

The full certification, with the possible estimate.


Each comparison provides a different information, depending on the
reference or baseline chosen.
Evolution of the estimate as the execution progress
As certifications is being approved, the estimate current value is also
saved, so that you can see its progress over the execution of the project.
These values are in the estimate windows, in certification layouts and
in the stages windows, in Est, EstIni, EstMod, EstPend fields of
the Stages table.
Following the same criteria, the values for the target costs and other
estimates based on the target, in the Tgt, TgtEst and TgtReal
fields are also saved.
Other combinations of fields
The program calculates all combinations of prices and quantities disaggregated by states.
The fields name contains the pricing structure and the state, in the
following combinations:
Value
Prefix Structure
Quantity Qty
Amount Amnt
Amount Amnt Est Plan Real Cert Tgt
For amounts can be used both ways

132 Manual de Presto manual

Status
Structure
Ini Mod Pend [N]
Ini Mod Pend [N]
Ini Mod Pend

The N indicates the index pricing structure, according to the table of the
economic model.
Fields are always of the Relations table, because the unit prices of
the items are identical for all states, for which the differences appear
only in the quantities and amounts.
Field
Relations.QtyIni [1]
Relations.QtyMod [3]

Description
Concept take-off lines in the initial estimate.
Quantity executed the concept corresponding
to approved changes.
Amount of the concept in the initial estimate.

Relations.AmntEstIni
Relations.AmntIni [1]
Relations.AmntPlanMod Amount of planning that applies strictly to apRelations.AmntMod [5] proved modified.
Relations.AmntEstPend Amount of changes of the estimate pending of
Relations.AmntPend [1] approval.
Relations.AmntRealPend Amount of the executed part of the project
Relations.AmntPend [3] pending of approval.
Results of monitoring cost
The breakdowns and comparisons by state are available:

In layouts of states of the estimate windows.


In the estimate windows, activities and stages subordinate
windows.

In the main window of activities.

Reports of the group 05 Certifications:


Take-off lines by states
Chapters and work items with breakdown of take-offs by state approval.
Comparative summary of modified
Chapters with breakdown of amounts by approval states.

Presto in project management 133

134 Manual de Presto manual

Presto for construction company


This chapter describes the processes to be performed to monitor the
cost from the point of view of the construction company:

Procurement and subcontracts.

Control of production.

Invoicing and other documents of accounting and management of one or more projects.
Analysis of costs and expenses.

The Earned Value Management for the construction company (EVM)


and the Economic Information System (EIS), as described in Service
request web of Presto, Contracts and orders, billing and control
section.

Procurement and subcontracting


Presto calculates the resources needed to carry out different processes:
Calculate the necessary equipment and operators.

Create contracts.

Analyse the performance from a financial point of view.


The procurement process can be automated considerably if a work is
prepared buying groups, and subsequently adapted to each supply in
the work groups are assigned.
The resource calculation previously requires to define how to execute
the project concepts, dividing them into two major sections:
Supplies
Those who will buy or outsource.

The concept nature icon is coloured orange background.


Are purchased or contracted, and their inferior concepts, if
any, are not taken into account for the purposes of execution.

Destination
Also called cost centers.
Those who are to be manufactured or will be receiving of allocations.

The concept nature icon is green background colour.


Presto for construction company 135

It can be work items, chapters, or any other concept created


that you want to know its cost.

A destination can be part of another destination.

The root concept is always a destination.

It assigns to a concept the property of a supply / destination


The assignment is done via the context menu on the Code, NatC,
Nat or TypeCost fields.
Concepts.TypeCost
.TypeCostX
Type cost TypeCostX By default
Supply
1
Basics
Path

Contract

Undefined 0

Meaning
Purchased or outsourced to third
parties.
Chapters
It runs on the work or other form by
(trades)
grouping. Equivalent to the cost
center.
Chapters and It groups suppliers to solicit bids to
destinations the same type of supplier.
Work items Concepts unclassified.

For example, the work items that are decomposed should uncheck as
supplies to obtain the number of operators simultaneously present in
the work or the amounts disaggregated by natures. Once calculated
the resources, you can return to the previous situation. Once calculated the resources, you can return to the previous situation.
Fills in procurement groups
Purchasing groups represent families of products that are outsourced
or purchased from the same suppliers. The assignment of purchasing
groups to the supplies permit grouping for the calculation of resources and the creation of contracts.
Concepts.Group
Group or family purchase assigned to a concept.
Figure in windows:
Estimate, layout Resources and purchasing groups.

Concepts scheme contracted supplies or orders.

136 Manual de Presto manual

The group code may or may not correspond to an existing concept.


The suggest button shows the groups that are in the box buying
groups.
The concepts without purchasing group are assigned to the purchasing group of the first superior who does. This way, you can assign
purchasing groups generic to the chapters and only need to assign
specific groups to the inferior concepts that are contracted separately.
For example, if the chapter of structures is assigned to a group and
the concrete plant to another, separately will be obtained the necessary resources for the execution of the structure and for the supply of
ready-mixed concrete.
If you must purchase the same concept to more than one supplier
can:

Using the same concept and break down after the contract.
Duplicate the concept with other code and assign it of input
to two purchasing groups.

The group, family or lot of purchasing associated to each supply can


be assigned manually, or globally via this option of PROCESS menu,
which has several criteria to choose.
Project with contracts
Its a Presto project and must be selected in FILE: Working environment: Master references: Contracts. The project can be prepared before computing resources and lets you:
Use the same classification of purchasing groups on all works.

Associate the appropriate purchasing group to each supply.

Attach each contract a predefined text.

Find the most suitable suppliers for each contract.

The box purchasing groups must contain concepts chapter type. Associated supplies and suppliers, if any, should be as inferior concepts.
The search for the groups corresponding to each supply is provided
by two alternative systems.
On the supply code
The group of supply is the chapter that share more initials with the
supply code, looking in decreasing order of characters.
For example, for supply of code P17AB01, P17AB01, P17AB0 ,
P17AB, P17a, P17 , P1 and P are searched the chapters until it
finds one.
Presto for construction company 137

In this case, the purchasing groups table should only contain chapters
and suppliers.
By association of groups and supplies
In this case, the concepts of type chapter must have as inferiors the
supplies that apply, that must be work items or basic natures.
The supply code also is searched also by decreasing order of characters, so it is only necessary to include the supplies needed based on
the common initials. For example, if all the ceramics bricks begin with
P10ML, the purchasing groups need only the reference material
P10ML.
If the purchasing groups table must have supplies whose code matches
to any chapter, add an underscore _ after the code of supply; the
program does not take into account in search.
Unlike the previous case, the group is not the same found concept,
but its parent of chapter type. This system is very flexible, because the
coding system of the groups and supplies can be completely independent.
Initial
It assigns a code group consisting of the initials of each supply code.
Basic concepts
It classifies the supplies by basic natures. If the group is registered as
a concept, its description is displayed.
Calculate resources
This PROCESS menu option calculates the resources needed to execute the project. This calculation is necessary to generate the contracts or for obtaining the number of operators and equipment.
Resources are all the project concepts, whether or not supplies, who
have not concept that is superior that be supply. Thus, the sum of
amounts of all resources match the total of the project.
Using a selection or masks, you can filter the concepts you want to
calculate the resources, from all the project to a chapter or set of work
items.
The four criteria of calculation can be executed separately and their
results are independent, so it can be obtained, consulted and used
four different sets of values.

138 Manual de Presto manual

Days, months and years


It calculates the daily necessary resources based on the data of the
Gantt chart, distributing the estimate and target quantities linearly on
the weekdays of each task.
Results by date
In the Concepts window, subordinate Resources.
In the Diary window, subordinate Resources with the layout related to days or months. Values for months and years are the sum of
their days.
By stages
Necessary resources for each stage or certification period. The quantities are taken from the planned quantity in each stage, so there are
only values for the target.
Results by stages
In the Concepts window scheme Labor and machinery phased
there is a drop-down list to select multiple columns for resources in
phases.
In the Dates window, Resources subordinate, both with layouts
concerned to stages.
By activities
Required resources to execute each activity. The quantities are based
on the activities to the take-off lines are associated. They are calculated not disaggregated by dates, which are not dependent on the status of activity on the Gantt chart.
Results by activities
In the Activities window, subordinate Resources.
Calculating equipment
This option deletes the existing values and populates the field in the
manpower and equipment concepts, dividing the total quantity of
required hours in the stage by its number of days and by the entered
value in the Duration of the workday in hours option.
Results
In the Concepts scheme Labor and machinery phased window,
choose QtyEquipment drop-down list multiple fields.

Presto for construction company 139

Breakdown by stages with different types of grouping


By stages, grouped by
It calculates the resources disaggregated by stages, based on economic planning, gathering the resources by various criteria.
The results are seen in VIEW: Resources by groups, containing layouts with different levels of breakdown and sorting criteria.
First superior of the target type
Resources and the amounts for each destination and phase are obtained.
The concepts without top of type destination are assigned to the root
concept.
Purchasing group
It is the natural choice to generate contracts.
The concepts are grouped by the field content with the purchasing
group, with the conditions described in Purchasing groups.
If a concept depends on several higher concepts belonging to different purchasing groups will be subdivided into the required groups.
Suppliers
Concepts.Supplier
Filling in this field concepts, enables resource pools alternative to purchasing groups form.
Fields of the resources table
Resources.Code
Code of the activity concept.
.Date
Date on which used.
.Group
Group that is used.
.DescriptionGroup
Summary of the group.
.NatGroup
Nature of the group.
.Stage
Stage where is used.
140 Manual de Presto manual

.QtyStocks
Quantity of the concept purchased and not consumed at the date.
.QtyEquipments
Number of equipment.
.QtyPendCont
Quantity pending of hiring.
.ContPend
Amount due to contract.
Results of the calculation of resources
Directory 03 Financial planning:
Analysis of resources by months
This Excel template displays a detailed load histogram of the necessary resources, once the resource calculation performed.
Contracting and purchasing
A contract is a grouping of similar supplies, that are executed or
served by a same family of suppliers. Contracts are used to request
offers from suppliers, comparing the results, choose the most suitable
awarded and provide the basis for managing the execution of the
work.
The contracts have the same properties of concepts, and are always
characterized by cost centers or destinations. Its behaviour is similar
to other documents and supplies that in the case of contracts are
their inferiors concepts.
Contracts can be created:

Manually in the Contracts window, by entering the supplies


in the corresponding subordinated window, as well as text and
other needed associated files.

Manually marking chapters as Contract on its code or nature in the estimates windows, provided they contain not cost
centres in their inferior concepts.

Automatically using the procedure described below.

Create contracts
This PROCESS menu option previously requires the calculation of
resources.

Presto for construction company 141

A contract for each group that appears in the Resources by groups


window, which may correspond to destinations, purchasing groups or
suppliers is generated. You can delete from this table the groups that
do not want to convert into contracts, select some groups or filter
them using a mask.
Allows you to create, for each group:
A single contract, with the quantity broken down by stages.

A separate contract for each stage.

A contract with the outstanding amount of hiring.

The contract code is formed with the purchasing group code and if
that code already exists, it add the prefix _, and existing previsionals
contracts for the same groups are eliminated, unless the option of
pending quantities is selected.
The description and the text of the contract are taken from the selected purchasing group database, looking for equivalence between
codes.
Contracts are generated with the red state, so to calculate the contracted quantities and amounts, you must to change the status to
Black or Green.
In the estimate structure of chapters, with the CON_ code containing the contracts generated and facilitates its integration to the estimate, a chapter is created.
Integration in the estimate
Contracts can be part or not of the structure of the estimate, if they
have superior concepts that link to the root concept.
If part of the structure, besides its own contract amounts, the same
economic values for other concepts are obtained.
If the contracts are part of the structure but do not want to join the estimate, you must set field as null (the quantity or the price).
Contracts can fully match to the estimate chapters. Thus, subcontracted work items match the certifiable and obtained directly all amounts
necessary for economic monitoring.
Contracted quantity and price target
The quantity of each supply contract is the target quantity.

142 Manual de Presto manual

This quantity can be segmented into stages and if is introduced so


into Supplies subordinate window, Quantities by stages layout, or
when is automatically generated.
The contract target cost is obtained by applying to the total contracted quantity the target unitary price for supplies.
Each stage contains the following fields:
Stages.QtyPlan
Quantity to contract in the stage, introduced directly or calculated
based on the take-off lines allocated to this planning stage.
.Plan
Amount corresponding to the last quantity, a price target.
.PlanEst
Contracted quantity, to the estimate price.
Request prices to suppliers
Associate suppliers
Each contract can be up to 16 providers, which are associated dragging the supplier from the window of entities or by choice
and associate suppliers.

Search

Their data is entered in the appropriate columns of the subordinate


window of supplies.
Remove bid
On the window header removed permanently supplies provider comparison. To remove a supplier temporarily, without losing the prices
offered, assign Color

Grey in the window of entities.

Concepts.NumSup
This field contains the number of suppliers associated to the contract.
Find and associate supplier
It selects the appropriate suppliers for each contract by:
All suppliers of the project, in light yellow.
Purchasing groups suppliers corresponding to the contents of
Group field of the contract or to its inferior concepts, as described in Purchasing groups table.
Suppliers can be filtered by ZIP code of the work.

The marked suppliers are associated to the contract by clicking Accept.


Presto for construction company 143

Request prices
Contracts can be sent to suppliers to request tenders:

In Presto or Excel format, with FILE: Export: Price quote option.

Through reports or Word templates.

Export price request


This option generates a Presto project or an Excel workbook for each
supplier that is associated to contracts without awarding.
If it is a project, will contain a chapter for each contract in which the
supplier is displayed, with the quantity to bid on each supply.
For an Excel workbook:

A sheet or tab is created for each contract in which the supplier appears.
Each sheet has the contract code, its name and text, the general data of the project and the constructor data.

It contains a concept for each supply, with the offered quantity


and an empty column for the price.

All fields are protected (not password), except the price.

In both cases, the name of the generated files is the project plus the
supplier code, separated by an admiration. In addition, an email is
created for each supplier whose Email field is defined, with the corresponding attachments files.
The supplier must complete the unit price that proposes, clear the
concepts does not offer and return the same file.
Import price request
Sent requests can be imported with FILE: Import: Bid.
This option automatically populates the price offered by the supplier
for each supply. The supplies that have been deleted from the project
or the Excel workbook are displayed with NA price.
In the message window possible incidents are indicated, as nonexisting contracts or supplies not enlisted in the contract.
Input the received data
Received bids are entered automatically as described in Price quote,
or manually in the fields associated to the supplier in the supplies
window. The supplier code is in the header field and the full name
appears on the track help.
144 Manual de Presto manual

Prices.Price
Price offered by the supplier to this supply and this contract.
A supplier can only bid at all times to the same unitary price for each
supply. However, the price is saved with the contract while awarding,
and the bid price may vary thereafter.
The NA (not available) value indicates a supply not offered; it can be
introduced with [Delete] key. The zero price means that the concept
has not cost and is included in another.
The amount is the bid price applied to the target quantity.
.Note
Specific comment for a supplier and a supply.
Award and use of contracts
Compare contracts
Comparing contracts can be performed directly in the contracts window, where the total amounts that can be compared with each other
and with the target amount of each contract.
You can also use the report Comparative contract or export the layout to Excel.
Concepts.BaseAvg
Contract amount considering in each supply the average price offered
by suppliers.
.BaseMin
Theoretical minimum amount of the contract, taking in each supply
the shortest of the offered prices.
Compare the supplies of the contracts
They are seen in the subordinate contracts window called Supplies.
.SigmaCont
Normalized standard deviation (divided by the average price) of different bids of each supply.
.AvgCont
Average unit price of the supply bids.
Relations.AmntAvgCont
Supply amount to the average unit price.
Concepts.MinCont
Unit Price offered lower of the supply.
Presto for construction company 145

Relations.AmntMinCont
Amount of supply with the lowest offered price.
Award a contract to a supplier
The contract is awarded choosing the vendor code from those in the
offer, using the suggest button.
Also a contract is awarded with Award option on the header of any
column of the desired supplier, in the supplies subordinate window.
In awarding a contract to a supplier:

The offered price for each supply goes to Price field of the
relationship between supply and contract, being fixed, but later the supplier bid this same supply to another price.

The price is also copied to the Cont field of the concept that
contains the last price at which it was contracted. This field will
be replaced if it is subsequently awarded the same supply to
another price, by the same or another supplier.

Concepts.Supplier
In contracts, code of the chosen supplier in the contract award.
.Cont
This field contains the total contract amount to the prices offered by
the supplier of choice.
Relations.AmntCont
Amount of the contracted supply.
Update the target from the contracts supply prices
Skip contract price target
Choice of the Contract window, through which, once the supplier,
copy the price of supply in the Concepts.Tgt field, and the vendor
code in the Concepts.Supplier field awarded.
Creating documents of economic control from contracts
Transfer to order | Transfer to delivery order | Transfer to invoice
Since contracts can create orders, deliveries, invoices, provided that
the tenderer is not the type Supplier (cumulative).
In the generated document, the OriContract field contains the contract code of origin. If the contract quantity is not broken down by
stages, the new document has the contracted quantity less the ordered or delivered for each supply, as applicable.
146 Manual de Presto manual

Results of contracting and purchasing


If the contract is part of the estimate structure and are introduced
appropriate quantities and prices, the results for contracts are the
same as for any other concept are obtained, as estimated production,
earned value or the actual cost.
If the contract structure matches the estimate can compare revenues,
costs, certification and values of economic management.
From award contracts may make a financial planning. Refer to
PROCESS: Create invoices, section of contracts.
Estimate windows
In the subordinate window Prices, In contracts layout, you can
check the price for each concept offered by each supplier.
Reports of the group 07 Procurement:
Some reports take into account the status of contracts. For example,
to print a firm contract is not enough to award the tender to a supplier; further its status should be Black or Green.
Price quote
It prepares a letter to each supplier, with the requested quantities of
concepts to bid; only you have to fill prices.
Comparative contracts
It compares the offered lots by different suppliers, and shows in green
the cheapest bids, the amount of the ideal bid, the average and the
deviation from the expected estimate.
Firm contracts
It prepares a document with the main features of the successful tender.
Contracts and supplies
Contract disaggregated by supplies.
Contracted and ordered concepts
Control of deviations of quantities: planned, contracted and order.
Work items from a supplier
It displays the items relating to each supplier.
Resources by groups
List of resources grouped by group, previously calculated with the
process options Calculate resources.

Presto for construction company 147

Firm orders
Documents of orders to suppliers.

Production
Production is the project actually executed, valued at estimate prices.
It represents the collection right, which may or may not coincide with
the certification, and is the basis for calculating the actual cost of the
cost centers.
The project actually executed is introduced in the same way as certification, either as a lump sum of the work item, by stages or associating take-off lines. From this level of detail dependent the production
values that are obtained for tracking the project.
If the actual execution matches the certification, you can directly copy
data between fields of stages.
Copy certifications
This PROCESS menu option, copies the take-off lines, stages or
lump sums from the pricing structure chosen in Origin to the chosen in Destination, eliminating previously the pre-existing information.
It is a quick and easy way to get:

Production, as a result of copying certification.


The estimated certification as a result of copying the planning.

If the destination is planning, the lump sums are not copied.


Fields of production
Production can be obtained based on different quantities and at different levels of detail.
The critical areas for monitoring the project, as estimated production
and non-certified production are obtained approval disaggregated
states.
The indented indicate fields that are breakdowns of the above.
Fields
PlanEst

Estimated production, based on the target


Planned production until current stage.

TgtEst

Estimated total production.


Broken down by states of approval.

TgtEstIni

Estimated total production contained in the


initial estimate.

148 Manual de Presto manual

Fields
TgtEstMod
TgtEstPend

Fields
RealEst

Estimated production, based on the target


Estimated total production of the amended
estimate.
Estimated total production pending of approval.
Real production
Real production until the current stage.
Broken down by states of certification.

RealCertEst

* Executed and certified (firm) production.

RealNoCertEst

* Executed and non-certified (pending) production.


Broken down by approval states or risk levels.

RealNoCertEstIni Production in process contained in the initial


estimate.
Production in process corresponding to the
RealNoCertEstMod modified.
RealNoCertEstPend

Production in proceedings pending of approval.

* Calculated solely from take-off lines matching


Expression
RealEst - Real
PlanEst - Plan
TgtEst - Tgt

Margin or profit
Real, to date.
Estimated, until date.
Estimation, until the end of the project.

All these fields are obtained for the work items and the higher concepts as well as for activities, phases and calendar.
They may have the prefix:
Qty, referring to quantities.

Amnt, which refers to amounts.

Without code, which are also typically amounts.

The most commonly used values on the diagrams of each production-related window. Others can be found by selecting the column to
the table and field.
For example, the production pending of approval and not certified, by
days, months or years, is:
Presto for construction company 149

Diary.RealNoCertEstPend
The amounts disaggregated by approval states provide very detailed
results, which can provide more information than the totals. For example, the overall difference between production and certification:
RealEst - Cert
It does not let detect uncertified production if is offset by certification
that is not in the estimate.
The program also calculates the most significant percentages.
Field
Meaning
Chapters (trades)
PerProdEst Production
(RealEst * 100) / Est
over estimate.
PerProd
Real advance (RealEst * 100) / TgtEst
on overall production.

Other items
(QtyReal * 100) /
QtyEst
(QtyReal * 100) /
QtyTgt

You can get other percentages, deviations and comparisons using


user fields or reports.
Portfolio: estimate pending of execute
This predefined expression shows the work pending of execute respect to the total target:
Relationes.AmntTgtEst - Relations.AmntRealEst
The pending work over the total possible estimate may be obtained
from the expression:
Relations.AmntEstPossible - Relations.AmntRealEst

Invoices
The economic control system has two targets, one administrative and
other analytical:

The monitoring of invoicing, typing various documents, according to the desired level of control, such as orders, deliveries, invoices and maturities.

The cost analysis, integrated with document management.

Presto suits many different control procedures; is advisable to know


the different possibilities well before its implementation.

150 Manual de Presto manual

Project settings: Calculations: Consider only documents in approved


stages
With this enabled option are not considered the purchases or the
allocations on deliveries or invoices after the current certification date.
Documents of the economic control
The invoicing process can be performed by orders, deliveries or invoices. The introduction of orders and deliveries is optional.
The common options to all three types of documents, which are introduced into the windows Orders, Deliveries and Invoices are
described in this section.
The Work assignments window has a similar behaviour described in
Analysis of costs and expenses.
The documents are broken down into supplies and can take a text
and associated files. Invoices can also have maturities.
Documents state
Documents in red and grey status are considered pending of approval
and are not taken into account in the calculations, except for the balance and cash flow.
The document status is chosen and indicates with its own colour
the Document and Note fields.

in

.State
Approval status of the document.
Required fields
To create a document you must enter at least the following:
.Document
The code combination of document and entity must be unique for
each year. If you are exporting the documents to an accounting program, consider its specific conditions.
.Entity
Agent code that emits or receives the document. To the right appears
the Description field of the entity. Do not exists on work assignments.
This entity can be modified while any of the document supplies be
associated to another document.
.Date
Greyed if not considered in the calculation.
Presto for construction company 151

Other common fields


.Info
Indicates whether the document has supplies, text or associated files,
as described in Use Interface: Layout: Columns of information fields.
.BaseOrd | .BaseDel | .BaseInv | .BaseDest
Sum of the amounts of supplies of a document that are associated
with documents of each of the other types.
It detects easily the status of order, delivery, invoicing and consumption of supplies.
.Note
Brief summary of the document.
.DestinationDef
Document default destination.
.DefDescription
Summary of destination by default.
.OrContract
Contract of provenance of the document.
.Place
Location where the delivery of supply or service.
.Payment
Days to pay.
.Bond
Percentage of guarantee.
.UsrNum
Numeric value that the user associates to the document.
.Issued
Type of document. 0: Received from suppliers, 1: Issued to customers.
.AccSupplier
Account counterpart of the document.
.Work
When an integration of linked projects is done, figure the project of
origin of the invoice, provided that all the supplies are of a single project.

152 Manual de Presto manual

Common options to documents


The following options are also available in the subordinate window of
supplies of each document.
Transfer to order | Transfer to invoice
Create a document of the type indicated from the source document.
It can be enabled on a document, a supply or a selection of them. If
its activated on several documents at once, a single document for
each supplier involved, with all the supplies.
You can also create documents:

Dragging a document from one type to the window of another.

Writing a document code, which may or may not exist previously, in one of the fields of a supply document.

Merge
It consolidates all supplies of the concept of each one of the selected
documents, with the total quantity and the weighted average price.
Copy the previous document
It copies the supplies of the previous document of the same supplier.
It is especially useful for creating invoices to origin.
Supplies
The documents are broken down into supplies, with concepts orders,
delivered or invoiced.
In this section are described the common options to all types of documents, except those corresponding to the analysis of costs, such as
allocations to destinations and projects.
Although not specifically marked, it becomes in a supply all indefinite
concept that be in a contract, order, delivery or receipted invoice.
Supplies.Code
Supplies may be added:
Typing your code by copying and pasting or dragging the
concept from the windows of the budget and concepts.

With the suggest button, which shows the most likely supplies,
as already supplied by the same supplier and of the same nature.

Typing new codes that are not in the estimate.


Presto for construction company 153

The description and the unit of measure are the same of the concept
in the estimate.
To rename a supply code, rename your code concept. This can be
done in any of the windows budget or concepts.
.Quantity
The suggest button shows useful values to fill the field, as the estimate and target quantities, contracted, ordered, delivered and invoiced, for the document supplier and also the totals.
If the quantity is zero, the unit price is taken directly as amount; this
allows you to enter additional costs of a supply that do not involve an
increase in the quantity.
.Factor
Coefficient that affects the quantity of the supply.
.QtyNet
Net quantity, product of quantity and factor.
.PerDiscount
Discount rate affects the price of supply.
.Price
Unit price of supply. The default price is the contract price or the target, in this order.
The suggest button shows useful values to populate the field, as estimate prices, target and real, last, minimum and maximum contracted.
Although the price is displayed with rounding established for concepts of basic natures, if more decimal places are entered, is saved
and is operated without rounding.
.PrNet
Net price, resulting from applying the discount to the unit price.
.Amount
Product of the net price multiplied by the net amount.
.IVA
Percentage of tax applicable to the supply. Default applies the VAT
associated to customer or supplier.
.Note
Text for a specific supply.
.DateSched
Scheduled date of delivery of a supply.
154 Manual de Presto manual

.DateEnd
Completion expected date of delivery of the supply.
.DateProcurement
Purchase date of supply, which lets you assign different dates of the
document to which it belongs.
.ProcurementOK
It has value 1 when the purchase document is on firm and the purchase date belongs to the approved certifications.
Relationship between documents
A same supply line can appear simultaneously in an order, in a delivery and in an invoice, and always will be of the same supplier. Thus,
the tracking is very easy, since each supply of a document, the other
documents those belong it, is directly checked.
.Order | .Delivery | .Invoice
These fields show the other documents contained in the supply. You
can also type a document code, existing or not, to add the supply.
If a code is changed, the supply changes to the new document.
If the code is cleared, the supply is removed from the document, but
if the full line of supply is removed in a document window does not
disappear from the other documents listed.
In addition, double-click these fields opens the corresponding window filtered for that document.
Split
Unfold a supply to facilitate deliveries, invoices or fractional allocations.
Examples
The following case has been made an order that it has been received
and has been completely invoiced:
Concept Quantity Order
Bricks
10.000
P-008

Delivery Invoice
A005
08/2004

For that, the supply has to maintain the same quantity and the same
price in the three documents. If not, it should unfold as many times as
necessary:
Concept Quantity Order
Bricks
3.000
P-008

Delivery Invoice
A005
07/2004
Presto for construction company 155

Concept Quantity Order


Bricks
5.000
P-008
Bricks
2.000
P-008

Delivery Invoice
A006

In this example we have received two deliveries of a larger order and


are only invoiced one of the deliveries.
You can also create supplies in an order that are delivered and invoiced in other documents:
Concept
Bricks
Bricks
Bricks

Quantity Order
10.000
008
5.000
5.000

Delivery Invoice
A005
A008

08/2004
10/2004

It has been delivered and invoiced the entire order, as the total quantities matches, but in two parts.
However, if a supply is separately on a delivery and an invoice, is considered to have been purchased in duplicate:
Concept Quantity Order
Bricks
10.000
Bricks
10.000

Delivery Invoice
A005
08/2004

In this case, 20,000 units were purchased. The part is delivered unvoiced and invoiced portion is undelivered.
Invoices
The invoice is the most comprehensive document for administrative
control and cost analysis.
Previsionals invoices are those with its Red status. This type of invoices is used for example before starting the execution to analyse
the financing by charges and previsionals payments.
Invoices.Entity
The invoice type depends on the type of the associated entity:
Entity
Any

Invoice
Received

Cumulative Received to
source

Color
White
Orange

156 Manual de Presto manual

Utilization
All kinds of purchases and expenses
Purchases to suppliers to origin

Promoter
User

Issued
Issued

Blue
Blue

Collection of certifications
Collects on sale of homes

The entity may change of type while only is associated to an invoice.


The invoices from customers, it is considered that the issuer is the
entity defined as Builder type.
When an invoice is created, the next values of the associated entity
are taken by default that are entered in the Entities window, Invoicing layout:
Field (*)
Use
WithldngWarrDef Warranty withholding
WithldngTaxDef Withholding tax
PerVAT
VAT rate
DayPayment1
First payday
DayPayment2
Second payday
MethodPayment Mode of maturity
(*) Fields of concepts table

It affects
Invoices
Invoices
Supplies of invoice
Maturities
Maturities
Maturities

.WithldngWarr
Retention rate that applies to the supplier as guarantee.
There are two ways to execute this withholding, as described in Maturities: Withholding.
.WithldngTax
Percent retained to supplier against their taxes and to be paid to the
tax authority.
.AmntWithldngWarr |.AmntWithldngTax
Amounts of warranty withholding and tax.
Those the warranty are accumulated in the address book fields and
entities:

WithldngWarr for received invoices.

WithlgCustomer for invoices issued to customers.

The WithldngWarr field of the supplier accumulates only guarantees


unpaid.
.IVA
Fee of the value added tax or equivalent tax, calculated on the rates
applied to each supply.

Presto for construction company 157

.Amount
Invoice total amount, i.e., base plus VAT less tax.
The red colour indicates a mismatch between the invoice and maturities:

Withholding maturities do not match with the result of applying the percentages displayed for the invoice.

The sum of maturities does not match the total amount.

.Exp
It marks when exporting invoices to accounting programs. To reexport, unmark previously.
e-Invoice XML
This Export menu option creates an XML file in electronic format
with the selected invoices to be digitally signed.
Suppliers with totalling invoices
The invoices to suppliers of this type is taken into account only the
last invoice from the supplier. Not accept orders or deliveries.

Each invoice must include the content of the previous.

Each certification stage can have only one invoice for each
supplier to origin.
Check Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Records of
economic control: Copy previous document.

.BaseInvOr
This field contains the basis to origin of an invoice from a cumulative
supplier. It has grey background in all invoices, except in the most
recent of each supplier.
Maturities
Each invoice issued or received may be associated with an unlimited
number of receipts or payments, respectively.
The context menu over the maturities or invoices windows let creating
automatically the most common types of maturities, with the corresponding breakdown to the invoicing of the associated entity. If the
maturities amount does not match its invoice, the Amount field of
the invoice is red.
The default maturity is that the payment method of the associate entity.

158 Manual de Presto manual

The processes that create invoices automatically also create the default
maturities, so that previously defining the payment method of each
entity is obtained together with the invoices the project calendar of receipts and payments.
Maturities can also be entered manually, by selecting the term of maturity from the context menu.
State of maturities
Maturities can be defined as paid or unpaid by colour or status with
the contextual menu on any field of maturity:

Paid: Black or Green.


Pending: Red or Grey.

These colors or states are in the Note field of the maturity.


Warranty withholding
Its a non-paid maturity that serves as warranty for the performance
of a work or delivery of a material. In automatic maturities, the warranty withholding is returned one year after the date of the received
invoice.
Withholding can be applied in the invoices window with one of the
following criteria:
Warranty withholding after VAT
Withholding is calculated on the base, and the VAT is paid in full on
the date that corresponds to your settlement.
Warranty withholding before VAT
Withholding is calculated on the base, but the payment of VAT is deferred to a further maturity when withholding is returned.
The WithldngWarr field of the invoice appears in grey.
Fields in maturities
Maturities.Date
You can set the date for each supplier maturity to one or two specific
days of the month. Indicated in the Entities window, Invoicing layout, in DayPayment1 and DayPayment2 fields:

In invoices received: entity defined as Contractor.

In issued invoices: entity associated to the invoice.

Presto for construction company 159

.Type
It indicates the source of the amount of maturity, and may be invoice
amounts, withholdings or taxes.
.Amount
Red colour indicates that this is a payment, and black one a collect.
.Note
The suggest button shows the most common payment instruments.
.Bank
Financial institution associated to the payment method.
.PerPayment
Percentage of the maturity respect to the invoice total amount.
.Cashflow
Difference between receipts and payments for the period.
.OrCashflow
Accumulated cash flow since the beginning of the work to date, with
its sign, which represents the state of treasury.
The IRR internal rate of return of this cash flow, is contained in Project settings: Miscellaneous option.
Fields aggregated on invoices
Invoices.PaymentPaid
Sum of paid maturities (black or green).
.PaymentPend
Sum of maturities pending of payment (red or grey).
Results of the invoicing
The CALCULATIONS: Documents option totalling all amounts by
item, suppliers and dates from the invoice data.
The amounts can be seen in the windows for each element type and
are in the fields indicated in the following tables.
Field
Contracts
ContPend
Orders
Procurement
Delivery orders

Amount in supplies, suppliers and dates


Contract
In contracts without assigned supplier
In orders
In deliveries and invoices
In delivery documents

160 Manual de Presto manual

Field
Amount in supplies, suppliers and dates
Invoices
In invoices
InvCustomer In invoices to customers
Fields of amounts of documents
Field
Calculated amounts in suppliers and dates
IVA
Input VAT
VATCustomer
Output tax
WithldngTax
Tax withholding deducted by supplier
WithldngTaxCustomer Tax deducted to customer
WithldngWarr
Warranty withholding practiced by the supplier
WithldngWarrCustomer Warranty withholding practiced to the customer
Fields of taxs, withholdings and warranties
Field
Calculated amounts in suppliers and dates
Collection
Collected maturities of customer invoices
CollectionPend Maturities pending of collect of invoices from customers
Payment
Maturities payed to supplier
PaymentPend Maturities outstanding of payment by the supplier
Maturity amount fields
Field
For each concept
QtyContracts
Concept total quantity in each document
QtyOrders
QtyDeliveries
QtyInvoices
QtyProcurements Total quantity in deliveries or invoices
Contracts
Concept total amount in each document
Orders
Delivery orders
Invoices
Procurement
Total amount in deliveries and invoices
Other results
Reports of the group 08 Invoicing
Deviations of supplies by suppliers
Differences between the supplies of the selected documents ordered
by supplier.
Used for example to detect if any supply has been ordered but not
delivered.
Presto for construction company 161

Deviations supply
Same as above, but ordered by delivery code
Deliveries by dates
Deliveries totalled by month and filtered by dates and suppliers.
Deliveries by suppliers
Deliveries totalled by suppliers and filtered by dates and suppliers.
Invoices of subcontractors with take-off lines
Received invoices, planned or pending of approval, whose supplies
are work items.
Invoices issued to customers
Issued invoices, planned or pending of approval, whose supplies are
work items, with or without take-off lines.
Invoices by suppliers
Invoices grouped by supplier, filtered and broken down by various
criteria.
Invoices and maturities
Invoices received or issued totalled by months and filtered by dates,
suppliers, or approval states.
Supplies by dates
It lets see the supplies between a certain date period, the previous
period and later.
Supplies totalized by suppliers
Supplies provided by each supplier in a period of dates.
Maturity for dates
Study of receipts and payments by date and statements of approval.

Centralized invoicing
To make the process of document management in a common way for
a group of projects is necessary to create a central project as described in Projects integration, where the general process of query
and use, is described, and enlist the works linked.
The management or invoicing process is identical to that described
for independent projects, except that:

The supplies allocations, plus of a destination, can be associated to one of the linked projects.

162 Manual de Presto manual

The concepts properties are unique by project, so that there


cannot be discrepancies between the central project and the
linked ones.

The calculation of actual costs for concepts that are consumed


by target is not calculated in the central work.

The cost analysis is performed on each project, though it may require


information generated in the central project, as the real prices of supplies.
Share of the Information between the central and the projects
All documents upgrade options consolidate orders and deliveries of
different works with the same document code, supplier and date, as
well as invoices, in this case, of the same year.
There are three ways to enter information into the central project and
on the linked projects, which determine the options to be used in
Update documents and Export documents, of the PROCESSES
menu.
1. Documents are introduced into the central project
No need to update information about the projects, unless you want
to integrate previously existing projects.
You can export the documents to each project for viewing, exporting
all Delete existing documents or Only documents not previously
exported.
2 . Documents are introduced into the projects
To incorporate the central use the Update documents option.
You can create new documents in the central project, for example, to
allocate common expenses, or alter the received documents. In this
case, to keep these changes, use the Only new documents option.
3. Allocations are performed in the projects
Although the documents are introduced in the central, in the project
is usually better to know the destination of each consumption.
To do this, the documents can be exchanged between the central
project and the individual projects by using the options Read cost
center allocations only and "Delete existing documents, keep cost
center allocations", without altering any other information of documents.

Presto for construction company 163

Update documents
This PROCESS menu option, updates the information in the central
project that refers exclusively to the documents of the linked projects.
Texts and associated files of awarded contracts and documents are
also imported.
Read cost center allocations only
It assigns to the supplies the destinations that have in the allocations
made in each linked project.
Delete existing documents
It import the documents of each linked project, erasing previously
those in the central project.
Only new documents
It imports documents of each project, without altering the existing
ones, even if they were changed in the projects.
Consult at the central the contracts of the linked projects
The general data of contracts awarded for each work, are in the windows of estimate sub window Pricing of a work scheme Contracts.
Awarded contracts and their supplies are in the Contracts window.
To see the origin project of the contract, add to the layout the
Code2 column.
The contracts codes must be unique for project
See in the central project, the documents of the linked projects
The general data of supplies and suppliers of each work, are in the
windows of estimate sub window Pricing of a work.
The documents, supplies, maturities and suppliers, managed and consulted on specific main windows of this data, as if it were an isolated
project. The only difference is that documents and supplies include
the Work field, which has the code of the linked project to which it
belongs. In the documents, is filled if all their supplies belong only to
a single project.
Export documents
This PROCESS menu option, updates the documents of the linked
projects from the information in the central project.

164 Manual de Presto manual

Delete existing documents, keep cost center allocations


It deletes the documents of each linked project but it maintains their
allocations and work assignments.
Delete existing documents
It replaces all existing documents in each linked project by that correspond to the central project.
Only documents not previously exported
Exports to each project not export documents.
Results of centralized invoicing
Given the wealth of information that can accumulate in this type of
management, reports filters by dates, suppliers, etc., to get more specific results and adjusted to reality.
Reports of the group 10 Multiobra
Purchasing, projects and suppliers
List of purchased supplies, broken down by manpower and supplier.
Works and costs center
List of works with cost centres and allocations received.
Projects, suppliers and purchases
List of projects with suppliers involved, and the supplies purchased to
each.

Analysis of costs and expenses


The same data entered in Presto for invoicing lets to analyse in detail
the actual costs of execution.
The cost calculation is based on two tasks:
Enlist the production of each cost center, as described in Production.

The allocation of consumptions, or allocation of supplies to


their cost centers, described in this section.

The actual unit cost of each cost center is the total amount of the allocations it receives divided by its production.
In all cost analysis processes are considered only the supplies of approved stages, if the labelled option is enabled.

Presto for construction company 165

Destination
The concepts of which we want to know the real cost should be
marked as targets or cost centers.
Contracts and the root concept are always cost centres and can also
be work items, chapters or concepts created specifically for it.
The difficulty of making a proper cost allocation increases geometrically with the number of cost centers.
In addition to the manually defined, Presto assigns as destinations the
undefined concepts that receive allocations.
A cost center may be part of other cost centers. The only limitation of
a cost center is that it cannot be both a supply, i.e., be bought or contracted.
Expense and cost
The use or consumption of a supply in the execution of a cost center
is identified by an allocation.
This allocation has two distinct stages:

The time of purchase corresponds to expense, which is an accounting concept. Presto allocate the expense in the date of
the document and to the destination of supply that is in the
delivery or invoice.
The time of the actual use of the resource in the execution
corresponds to the cost, which is an analytical concept. Presto
allocates the cost on the date of actual use or consumption of
supply.

The gap between expense and cost is essential to know the project
status, as described in the SIE (Financial Information System).
Consumption calculation types
Each concept can be associated with a method of calculating of consumption, which is described below.
Concepts.TypeConsumption
The type is normally associated in windows budget and the concepts:

0: Consumption by target.

1: Consumption by allocation.

166 Manual de Presto manual

Cost Allocation
In deliveries and invoices
When a supply of a delivery or invoice is consumed at once and at the
same destination, to generate the cost allocation only is needed entering its consumption date.
Supplies.Destination
Cost center code where the supply that is used, that must already
exist. The suggest button shows possible destinations, ordered by its
probability.
The supplies destination which are calculated by target figure in grey,
not taken into account in cost allocations.
.DateInput
Date the supply is consumed or used. The dates that are not considered in the calculation are greyed.
.InputOK
It has value 1 if the supply is a valid destination and date of attribution belongs to the approved certifications.
If the consumer is being charged, the purchase must be firm.
If consumption by target, it must have a part of the work with destination and valid date.
.Work
Work associated with the supply. Check Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Integration works.
In parts of work
The work assignment is a document without issuing entity, which allows enlisting inputs of supplies to their various destinations.
Fields with a different behaviour of the other documents are as follows.
Supplies.Quantity
The suggest button shows the amount of production. Introducing a
percentage in the next field can be allocated proportional consumptions to this value.
.Price
Shown in grey the actual unit cost obtained for the supply, which is
used to obtain the amount.
Presto for construction company 167

The use of the actual price on the work assignment avoids the need
to evaluate each of the supplies consumed. In addition, it independents the actual cost of each cost center of the possible price differences in different deliveries of the same supplies.
To know the real cost of cost centres taking into account the specific
purchase price of each supply, refer the allocations of expenses.
Consumption by target
The resources whose consumption is relatively fixed per produced
unit, as the materials, can be associated to the type of calculation
Consumption by target.
The unitary consumption of the concepts which are calculated by target is taken from the yield listed in the target cost, avoiding making
of allocations. It requires that exists a breakdown of the work items.
Presto automatically generates the allocations corresponding to consumptions by target in a work assignment. This work assignment cannot be changed, since in each calculation is generated again.
Concepts.QtyTotTheor
The concept total theoretical consumption is what should have been
consumed in the production function so far,i.e. the sum of the products of target unitary consumption in each parent multiplied by the
quantity produced from it.
Adjustment for purchases
In the supplies calculated by target may be a mismatch between two
quantities:
The difference between total purchases less stock.

The theoretical consumption.

Concepts.CoefConsTheor
Suggest button calculates the ratio of the previous two quantities,
providing that the ratio can be optionally applied to the theoretical
consumption to prevent this imbalance.
If the coefficient is 0, it is considered that not purchases and thus not
consumption, so that the work assignment is not generated.
The coefficient is applied to calculate the theoretical and actual
amounts, but is not included in the theoretical quantities and neither
in the work assignments.

168 Manual de Presto manual

In consumptions by target, the stocks must be entered manually, if this


setting is desired.
If a concept of consumption by target simultaneously acts as certifiable work item and as a component of others cost centers, the adjustment coefficient only is obtained and is applied to the quantities corresponding to these last ones.
Calculation of unitary consumptions
Relations.QtyReal
Consumption of certifiable items is equal to its production, regardless
of the type assigned consumption, which only intervenes if the work
item also contained in the decomposition of another.
The unitary consumption of a concept by allocation in each of their
superiors is the sum of the allocated quantities thereto, divided by the
total consumption of the superior.
Concepts by target unit consumption in any of their superiors is the
indicated in its decomposition, optionally set with purchases.
.QtyInput
This field contains the total quantity of the allocations between one
concept and another, without dividing by production.
In the subcontracted work items, this quantity corresponds to the
subcontractor invoicing, provided it have defined the destination, so
you can compare the production with the invoicing.
Concepts.QtyTotReal
Sum of amounts consumed of the concept in the entire work.
.QtyStocks
This field is contained in two tables:

Concepts for total stocks of the concept.

Resources for or annotate concept stocks staged. Its as multiple field in the window concepts.

Are in the concepts window, in the scheme of adequate stocks depending on the type of consumer you want to analyse.
Supplies consumed by allocation
Stocks are obtained as the difference between purchases and consumption, and in the last approved certification.
They are seen at the Stocks: Consumption by imputation layout.
Presto for construction company 169

Supplies consumed by target


Stocks should be filled manually, if you want to apply the adjustment
by purchases.
They look in Stocks: Consumption per target layout.
Calculation of actual costs
When not actual data on prices or yields, because not purchases or
allocations, the real price of default is:

For supplies, is the contracted or target.

For work items without production, is obtained from their inferiors.


The estimated final cost matches with the target, at the beginning of
the work, and the actual final cost, to completion.

The actual costing calculation is performed whenever there is any document or contract.
Actual cost of supplies
Concepts.Real
Relations.AmntReal
The real cost of supplies can have different origins:
Color
Orange
Grey
Red

How to calculate the real cost


Weighted average price of purchases.
If not purchase, is the price of the contract or target.
It comes from the import from another program.

In calculating the weighted average prices, if the quantity of a supply


is zero, the amount is added without increasing the quantity.
Real cost of the other concepts
The unitary actual cost of concepts that are not supplies is calculated
from the bottom to up based on the actual quantity and the actual
unitary price of their inferiors.
Color
Blue
Magenta

Type
Destination or cost center.
Undefined.

170 Manual de Presto manual

Probable price
Concepts.TgtReal
Relations.AmntTgtReal
The likely price suggest the total cost more probable of any concept
at the end of the work.
The proper term for this value, according to the EVM Earned Value
method is EAC (Estimate At Completion), or estimated final cost.
In Presto different estimates are calculated as defined in the EVM, but
also provides a more accurate value in these fields.
For supplies, the price probably is the same as the real.
For cost centres with production, is the same as the real. When not
production is calculated from the components, using as yields those
of the target, corrected with the procurement adjustment coefficient
if its consumption by target concepts.
For certifiable work items, the probable quantity is the target one.
Notional amount
Relations.AmntTheorReal
It is calculated valuing the theoretical consumption of each concept,
corresponding to the current production, to the actual cost.
In the concepts calculated by target is equal to the actual amount, but
which are calculated by allocation, gives an idea of the deviation due
solely to yields.
Other fields relating to the calculation of actual costs
Field
QtyReal
QtyTotReal
QtyTotTheor
Real

Meaning
Unitary real consumption or production.
Consumed total quantity.
Theoretical total quantity depending on the
target and production.
Unitary real cost.

AmntReal
TotReal

Consumed amount of a concept in another.


Consumed total amount.

TgtReal
Final unitary cost most likely of the concept.
AmntTgtReal Most likely final cost of the relation.
Input
Total charged to a concept in another in a
stage.

Table
Relations
Concepts
Concepts
Concepts
dates
Relations
Concepts
dates
Concepts
Relations
Stages

Presto for construction company 171

Field
QtyInput

Meaning
Table
Total quantity allocated to a concept in anoth- Relations,
er.
stages

Allocations of expenses
Field
Orders

Meaning
Allocations to the concept in orders.

Table
Concepts
phases
Delivery
Allocations to the concept in deliveries.
Concepts
orders
phases
Invoices
Allocations to the concept in invoices.
Concepts
phases
Procurement Allocations to the concept in deliveries and Concepts
invoices.
phases
Export invoices
PLUGINS menu option that generates a text file with the data of all
bills whose Exp is not marked, and mark the field. The data are
separated by tabs.

Exported only firm invoices.

Cumulative suppliers supplies are not exported.


The highlighted fields are exported only with the Winconta
option enabled.

Invoices considering the counterparts of the work, supplier, invoice or concept supplied are distributed.

The% VAT document appears only if all supplies of the bill are
the same; Figure 0 otherwise but the quota is filled.

Document Key Fields


Invoices G Invoice number|Supplier|Date|Type E: Issued / R: Received|Base|% VAT|% Tax W
ing|% Retention Warranty| Fee VAT Tax Installment Fee Guarantee Amount Curr
Type of retention money 0: After 1: Before|Work|Pending payment|Paid|Note|DestinationDef|AccSuppliers
Supplies J
Code|Unit|Description|QtyNet|PrNet|Amount|Invoice|Supplier|Destination|Work|
date|% VAT|Note|Price%|Discount|AccSuppliers
Maturities V Date| Amount | State P: Paid / E: Pending | Type N: Regular / RG: Warranty with
RF: withholding tax | Note | Invoice | Supplier

172 Manual de Presto manual

Document Key Fields


Suppliers S Code | Name | NIF | Address | Telephone | Title | Contact | Note | Cit
alCode | Email | Fax | AccSuppliers
Variables D [Variable Name | Value | Description]
Results of the analysis of costs and expenses
Reports of the group 09 Cost Analysis:
Allocations to cost centers
List of destinations and allocations received by each.
Allocations of consumptions
List of supplies consumed, with the destinations where are allocated.
Production by work items
For each stage or month, shows the planned quantities, certified and
produced in each work item, totalling the amounts by stages.
Production by chapters
Description of planning-certification-production to date.
Stocks valuation
List of concepts with the quantities not allocated or existing in the
stock, valued at the actual price.

Presto for construction company 173

174 Manual de Presto manual

Menus and options


This chapter breaks down the location of the different menu options,
but usually are detailed and explained in the process where they are
used.

FILE
New
It creates a new project, which is a file with the extension
.PrestoObra or .po10, on the indicated path.
When creating a new project without template, may require some
revision of data as the summary, name and value of some taxes, currencies or any other characteristic value of the project.
Template
Templates are Presto projects that serve as model for new projects,
avoiding entering repetitive data each time it is created.
The new project is a copy of the chosen template, with all their data
and properties. In it, the user can delete and add the chapters that
require to adequate the project to the habitual project. You can also
add new or delete existing templates.
They are located in the templates directory, and are supplied several
with different classifications, typology of projects and in several languages.
Check FILE: Working environment: Directories.
Open
It opens a project, a report or a CAD file, according to the window
from which is executed. The projects can also be opened from FILE:
Projects and from REFERENCES.
If Presto runs by the first time, the . PrestoObra extension is associated to the program, allowing open a project or import the file with
double-click in Windows Explorer. Depending on the Windows version, so this association is made may be necessary to run the program
at least once as administrator.
They can be opened simultaneously up to five projects. Each, displays
in the window header the opening order between brackets.
Presto works can be opened:
Menus and options 175

Directly, to read and write by a single user.

Directly, read-only mode by multiple users.

If the project is located in an http server on the Internet, typing or pasting the link in the dialog box Open. Opened in
read-only mode.
Through Presto Server, to be edited by multiple users simultaneously. Refer to Setup guide specific options Presto Server.

You can also open a project dragging to an icon or Presto


window.

Projects on standard exchange format, of extension .BC3, can also


be imported with FILE: Import: BC3.
If the project is password protected, the program will ask beforehand.
Some projects with password can only be opened from a particular
Presto license.
Open as read-only file
This option of Open dialog box opens the projects that are to be
used only in read mode, to prevent inadvertent modification.
The projects in read-only are opened much faster.
In the header of the window appears the message (read-only) and
all columns have the yellow background.
A project is automatically opened in read-only mode:

When the project is open by another user in read-only mode.

If the file, directory or media does not have write permission.


The works that are in the list of recent works, the end of the FILE
menu, open in the same way that opened the previous time. To open
it in another way, do it from the dialog box.
Projects
It catalogues, manages and administers projects. Directories and hidden files are not shown. The context menu options act on:
The directories, in the left frame.

The selected projects in the right frame.

Operate with directories


Create | Delete | Rename | Update
It lets performing these operations with directories.
176 Manual de Presto manual

Working directories
It is an alternative of this window to equivalent options of FILE:
Working environment: Directories.
Presto Server directories
Options permissions and user access. Refer to Setup guide specific
options Presto Server.
Operate with projects
The Projects window displays the following types of projects.
Icon

Extension
PrestoObra
PrestoObra
PrestoObra

Mode
Closed
Open in exclusive mode
Open in shared mode

The projects in read only appears with a yellow background.


Open | Close | Cut | Copy | Paste | Delete | Rename
Perform the operations with the works. Refer to Setup guide specific
options Presto Server.
Open as read-only
It opens a project that is to be used only in read-only mode, faster
than reading and writing.
Check integrity
It checks the relational integrity of tables, regenerates and recalculates the contents of field Info.
Read-only mode | Read-write mode
It assigns attributes of read or read and write access to a work. It
equals to the same operating system options.
Find in subfolders
It searches projects recursively in all subdirectories of the selected
directory. Its automatically disabled to avoid long waiting times.
Close, save and print windows
Close
Close the book, report or the CAD file without closing the program. A
work is also closed when you close the last open window. Refer to
Setup guide specific options Presto Server.

Menus and options 177

Save
Saves changes made to the text. Refer to Setup guide specific options Presto Server.
When you open a file in write mode .PrestoObra is created in the
same directory a file with the .PrestoRestore extension, which will
add information to the changes that are introduced in the work. If the
work is closed correctly this file is deleted. In another case, to reopen
the work Presto recovered from this file information is lost.
To ensure the information security, when the project is saved, Presto
carries out the following process:

The work is copied to a temporary file .PrestoSave.

If the backup completes successfully, the project file is renamed as .PrestoBak and . PrestoSave is renamed as
.PrestoObra.

If .PrestoSave file is not generated, .PrestoObra and


.PrestoRestore still exist, so Presto can recover lost information.

To restore the previous state of a project change the file extension


.PrestoBak with PrestoObra.
Save as
In single-user mode, it saves the work under another name or directory.
Printer setup
It lets selecting the printer, the size and orientation.
Preview
It prints the contents of the active window. The margins are indicated
in Working environment: Margins.
Touch screen
This option changes the display options and icons optimized for high
resolution devices.
Exit
Close the project and the program.
Import
BC3
See Link with other programs: Exchange of estimates.

178 Manual de Presto manual

Excel | Access
See Link to Excel and Access.
Allplan
Check Presto at the stage of project: Integration to BIM.
Bids | Prices
Check Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Comparison of multiple prices.
Take-off lines
Check Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Importing take-off
lines.
Price quote
Check Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and purchasing.
Primavera
Check Presto in the planning stage: Primavera and Project Link .
User profile
Refer to FILE: Working environment.
Schema layout
Refer to Use Interface: Layout.
Documents
It imports of another project all documents of the same type. It does
not import or modify existing documents with same code, entity and
date.
It imports also the suppliers and concepts that are in the imported
documents and that are not in the project previously.
Export
BC3
See Link with other programs: Exchange of estimates.
Excel | Access
See Link to Excel and Access.
Allplan catalogue
Check Presto in the design stage: BIM Integration: Integration between Presto and Allplan.

Menus and options 179

Microsoft Project
Primavera XML
Check Presto in the planning stage: Primavera and Project Link .
Price quote
Check Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and purchasing.
ContaPlus
Logic Class
See Link with other programs: Accounting: Logic Class and ContaPlus.
e-Invoice XML
Check Presto for contractors: Invoicing: Invoices.
User profile
Refer to FILE: Working environment.
Default layouts
Refer to Use Interface: Layout.
Working environment
It defines the status of the work habits of a user, common to all his
projects, part of the user profile.
The user profile contains the configuration of the working environment, including:
The status of all options FILES: Working environment.

Filters, expressions and user fields, which can be saved and edited in the Expression builder.
Other customizable properties that are maintained between
work sessions.
The activations of Presto modules.

Each user on the same computer has its own user profile that is
stored in the PrestoNNN.PrestoPerfilXml file, where NNN digits version. The file is in XML format.
The file is automatically saved each time you exit of Presto, in the
configuration directory.
Seen in FILE: Working environment: Directories: Configuration, such
as:
C:\Users\MyUser\AppData\Roaming\Presto
180 Manual de Presto manual

This directory is usually hidden; to see the option must be enabled


from Windows Explorer to display hidden files and directories. You
can also locate using the command %APPDATA%
When Presto is installed as workstation or a user executes Presto
without a user profile, the program creates a default profile, with a
standard configuration.
User profile
To use or save the common uses and customs, you can import and
export the profile. A profile can be distributed to other users, greatly
reducing the implementation times.
To switch layouts configuration see Use interface: Layouts: Customize
layouts.
To restore the default user profile, delete the profile file of the configuration directory.
Loading sequence settings:
1. Initialization
When starting Presto, takes the default configuration, and performs a
sequential search of configuration files that can exist in different directories.
If you find these files in any of the steps, the process terminates, and
otherwise continue to the next step.
2. User files, in the configuration directory
(PrestoNNN.PrestoPerfilXml)
The first time you boot Presto does not exist, and is created with the
original values once Presto closes.
On next occasions it boots Presto, it looks for this file and if it exists,
load full profile.
3. Administrator file, in the application directory
(Presto.PrestoPerfilXml)
If it exists, load full profile.
4. Location file in the Data directory of each location
(Presto.PrestoPerfilXml)
If it exists, load the configuration of windows, defined expressions and
filters.

Menus and options 181

FILE: Export: User profile


It lets saving manually the profile or any of theirs components, such
as user fields. So you can choose from several profiles, retrieve from
another computer or transfer components of the profile to another
computer.
FILE: Import: User profile
It replaces the active profile fully or partially by another. If importing,
expressions are detected with the same name, the new ones are renamed. To fully charge the profile, close Presto and reopen it.
General
Automatic fit of columns width
Sets width of table columns to their contents. Equivalent to the icon
Fit column width.
Automatic price recalculation
This option activates the work mode in which most of the calculations
are performed on the fly, avoiding press constantly the calculation
option.
To recalculate the values, execute CALCULATIONS: Calculate all or
activate the option again.
To expedite the work on large construction sites, or in the calculation
of some fields of concepts, it is desirable to disable this option.
Fields of concepts that can slow down calculations, have grey background when this option is disabled, and are:
Fields
Property
QtyTot *
Quantities in each pricing structure
Tot*
Total amounts in each pricing structure
QtyContracts
Total quantities for each type of document
QtyOrders
QtyDeliveries
QtyInvoices
NumInf
Number of superiors
NumSup
Number of inferiors
Tree level
Hierarchy level
* Add the prefix of each price structure

182 Manual de Presto manual

Accept lowercase concept codes


If disabled, to introduce codes of concepts, institutions and documents in tables and dialogs the program converted to uppercase.
Masks are not altered.
Show data from header concept
It lets the information of subordinate windows of Estimate window,
as text or take-off, corresponds to:
The concept where the cursor is.

The concept of header.

The chosen concept is called active concept.


Use the .po10 instead of .PrestoObra
Select one or another extension.
Block estimate alteration
It prevents alteration of data relating to the estimate, as the quantities
and prices. It also affects the changes in approbation states of the
take-off lines which involve the (red) pending state.
It affects all tools and processes related to the estimate, so it should
be taken into account in perform global operations.
Lock editing of approved certifications
Its a help that prevents data in the take-off lines and assigned stages
to approved certifications are altered, including planning and real
execution. It is useful to prevent accidental modification of this type
of data, but does not prevent other changes affecting the overall result of the certification, such as modifying or deleting concepts prices.
It affects all program processes, which should be taken into account
when performing operations as operating, duplicating, importing,
updating, or any other user process that alters the mentioned data.
Use field names and variables in English
It adapts the interface to English. See Language for the program.
Location
It adapts files used in Presto with the selected location, among which
are the works of example, references, templates, reports and supplements. It is independent of language for the program and work.
Interface language
Affects the fields, options and program menus.

Menus and options 183

Fields are available in some languages, using English as an international language.


To print reports in a language, it exists the following alternatives:

Printing reports designed in a particular language, which is included by default in the directory for each location. You can
also choose the reports directory in the Working environment or Projects window.

Print reports designed in multilanguage. In this case, the texts


for the language selected for the program are printed.

The numerical value of the language contained in the general variable


_Language.
To translate the program options to another language, refer to FILE:
Translate interface.
To translate the reports text strings into another language, refer to
FILE: Translate report.
The project language is independent of the used in the program, and
appears in VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous.
Google key for translation
See Use Interface: Windows text: Translate texts.
Appearance
It modifies some colors and text types used by the program.
Other features of appearance are modified by changing the display
properties of the operating system.
In Windows 8 is configured from the Control panel: Appearance and
personalization: Screen.
You can choose to change a percentage globally affecting all elements, or change some with the option:
Change only the text size
Property
Title bars
Menus

Message boxes
Icons

In Presto affects to
Title of the main windows.
Menus and options, including the tracks.
Name of tabs.
Title of subordinate windows.
Layouts dropdown lists, multiple fields of stages,
stage numbers, etc.
Emerging messages.
Options showing the directory structure

184 Manual de Presto manual

Themes
It lets selecting various styles and colors for windows, except the program itself, that use the defined layout and in the operating system
screen configuration.
Font
Font of the table windows.
Background or foreground colour
Colours assigned to each field type and value. If a field is empty, the
background takes the colour chosen for the text.
Directories
System directories
Configuration
Directory assigned by the operating system, independent for each
computer user.
User profile and license activation files are stored.
Temp
Directory assigned by the operating system, where intermediate files
are generated for internal use.
User directories
User
General directory for Presto documents not specified in other options.
It is used for example as a destination directory and origin of exports
and imports respectively.
You can also define in the FILE: Projects window.
Projects
Default directory for opening and saving projects.
You can also define in the FILE: Projects window.
During the installation process, the examples to this directory are
copied, which also projects include files in other formats to make different processes.
Reports and templates [User]
Default directory for the destination of reports generated automatically. You can include in this directory the desired reports, and will
appear on REPORTS menu options.
Menus and options 185

Plugins [User]
Directory to include the plugins that the user wants, and appears in
the options of PLUGINS menu.
Directory of the components by geographical location
Export layout to Excel
Default directory where files are Excel. Consult the section on export
windows Presto in Link with Excel and Access.
Reference
Directory where are catalogues, charts and development aid estimate,
which can be used as references to copy data from them to other
estimates. They look at the REFERENCES: References menu.
You can also define in the FILE: Projects window.
Plugins
Directory where programs or plugins of PLUGINS menu are.
Reports and templates
Default directory where reports and templates are in the REPORTS
menu are.
You can also define in the FILE: Projects window.
Templates work and reports
Default directory where models of works and reports are.
When creating a new project, projects appears of this directory to
choose one of them as a model.
When creating a new report or an automatic one, a copy of which
appears with the name Template is created in that directory.
You can delete, add or modify any of these files to suit their common
uses.
Databases
Location of reference projects used by Presto options.
Work
Prices

Contracts

Utilization
Database prices.
Used by wizards to update information generated
estimates and other program options.
Table of purchasing groups, with suppliers.

186 Manual de Presto manual

Formulas
The take-off lines formulas used are saved with each line; subsequently modified in this table does not affect them.
Margins
Margins used in printing reports.
Restrictions
There are several types of Presto use restrictions:

Customizing the interface, described in this section.

Restricting access to a project, as described in Project settings: Security.


Restrictions affecting a user to all their works, as described in
User restrictions.

Access to works and users permissions. Refer to Setup


guide, the Presto Server specific options.

Customizing menus
You can reduce the number of program options visible to each user,
to simplify the use or limit their access to projects.
The list of Active menus lets you limit the menus and the program
visible options. You can remove any option from the main menu and
their submenus, besoin their access icons, plus access to the Working
environment and Project settings dialog boxes.
Only activate options from authorized modules
It lets deactivate the visibility of icons and options assigned to
modules not available or disabled.
If you delete the access to configuration options, previously set them
as you wish. Restricting the access to certain program options may
very well define the use by different users. For example, to prevent a
user from changing Presto modules he has access, remove the access
to HELP: Activation option.
So that the user cannot change his menus customization is necessary
that the system of restrictions is enabled.
Refer to Appendix I. Technical Documentation: User Restrictions.
Access to reports, wizards and add-ins
You can choose the wizards, reports and plugins that appear in their
respective menus, eliminating the corresponding files of their directories or even the complete options.
Menus and options 187

Note that the user can access the wizards, reports and plugins located
in his user directory. If you deactivate REPORTS: Design report option, the user will can use the reports, but not modify them. You can
protect a report to be used, but not modified, even if you have access
to the design option.
Access to layouts
If you do not want to go to a schema, remove all fields except one.
See Use Interface layouts: Customize layouts.
PrestoServer
Configuration options for multiuser environments.
Refer to the corresponding section in the Setup Guide.
Translate interface
You have several options that allow:

Translate menus and options Presto to other than the original


language.
Add translations to Presto.

You can perform automatic translation using the resources of Google.


If you do not have them or language is not supported by this service,
the translation can be done manually.
Generate RTF
It generates an RTF file that serves as the basis for the translation of
Presto to the selected language.
You can use Google Translate if you have the proper key.
See Use Interface: Windows text: Translate texts.
You can add a check column to the RTF file, which allows you to check
if the reverse translation matches the original.
Source language
It let choosing the language from which the translation is to be performed.
Language name
If the destination language is <New>, should fill the cell to indicate
the language name that will be translated.
Include LNG file
It includes MSG_LNG_FILE column in the RTF file, whose contents
are the messages of the file specified language.
188 Manual de Presto manual

Convert RTF to LNG


From the translation in the RTF file, generates a valid file Presto LNG
language. This file must be copied into the subdirectory Data in the
installation directory.
Loading the LNG file in Presto
If the file does not contain a translation to a language of a particular
message, it will look for the translation between the languages in this
order:
Original language
Portuguese (BR)
Portuguese
Galician
Catalan
Euskara
Deutsch
French
English

Alternative language
Portuguese
Galician
Spanish

English
Spanish

So, partial translations can be made, for example to translate only the
portion of estimates and take-off lines.

EDITION
Editing operations using the usual Windows conventions and are described in detail in the chapter Use interface.
Undo | Special undo | Redo
See Use Interface: Edit: Undo | Redo.
Cut | Copy | Paste | Delete | Move
Refer to Use Interface: Edit.
Select all | Deselect all
Refer to Use Interface: Edit.
Find | Replace
Refer to Use Interface: Edit.
First element | Previous | Next | Last element
Refer to Use Interface: Windows.

Menus and options 189

Export layout to Excel


See Link to Excel and Access.
Restore schema
Fit column width
Refer to Use Interface: Layout.
Filter by expression | Filter by words | Cancel filters
Refer to Use interface: Filter elements.

VIEW
This menu gives access to most of the main windows.
Project settings
Common to all the work data in Presto at the stage of project: An
information system: Data and general properties of the work. And
other specific sections
Also seen in the VIEW: Variables window, Common layout.
Data
General fields belonging to the root concept of the work.
Miscellaneous
Fields not classified in others categories.
Currencies
Check Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Currencies.
Roundings
Number of decimal places to which values are rounded in calculations.
Calculation
Calculation options and percentages applied to the project.
Planning
Key dates of the work and other data involved in calculating durations. Check Presto in the planning stage: Temporary Planning .
Accounting
Data relating to indirect taxes and export to accounting programs,
described in Exporting to accounting.
Security
It lets protect the access to a project with a password.
190 Manual de Presto manual

Password
With
Sin

Functioning
The password is valid from the time the work is saved.
Remove the password of the project, if any.

Change password for the project


It lets enter or change the password for the current work.
Protection
To protect a project that can only be opened by the user in a specific
license, type here this user protection, that you can read on HELP:
Activation of your program.
Read-only password for the previous protection
It allows the access to this content exclusively for the user specified
protection and read-only.
Tables
In this window are the tables and records containing the work.
You can delete an entire table by selecting it and pressing to remove.
The tables in grey cannot be deleted, because they have required
data in other tables. For example, you cannot delete documents while
supplies.
Tree
This window and the Estimate one are the usual working windows.
The process of creating the estimate described in Presto at the stage
of project: Estimate.
This window is hierarchical, so to the behaviour of the table windows
adds special features described in Use interface: Windows: Hierarchical windows.
Layouts
The drawings are in the approximate order of estimate development,
from design to execution of the work.
In general, there are two large groups of layouts:

Concerning to estimates and activities (stages icon off).

Relating to certifications and stages (stages icon enabled).

Some layouts do not belong to one and other, and show a different
structure, without stages icon, or without multiple fields.

Menus and options 191

Number of activity or stage


The drop-down list lets you choose the number of activity or initial
stage, depending on your chosen layout (estimate or certification,
respectively), which takes into account in the viewing of the multiple
fields.
Dynamic fields
Drop-down lists with fields for activities or stages, depending on the
type of chosen layout. They display information from the selected
activity number or stage.
A same multiple field has different content for the same number of
stage or activity, depending on the selected layout.
Example: Activity or stage number 1 field Cert.
Types
of layout
Estimate
Certification

Data origin

Column content

Activities subordinated
Subordinated
Stages

Concept amount certified corresponding for activity # 1.


Amount certified of the concept in
the certification or phase # 1.

When a user field is chosen as one of multiple fields, user field data
are obtained depending on the type of layout:

Estimate: From user columns defined in the Activities subordinate window, Estimate layout.
Certification: From user defined columns in the subordinate
window Stages, Certification layout.

Layouts of estimations and activities


Summary
Concept code and description, with icons that indicate the types of
associated information.
Estimate
Minimum information necessary to draft the estimate.
Help for measurement
Useful information during the course of the take-off lines, as described in Take-off lines
The category allows you to check the measurements, as shown
in the wizard Categorizing.
192 Manual de Presto manual

Calculated values of the work item can be used in the take-off


lines of other work items.

Headers of the take-off lines and assigned formulas.

Comparison of prices | Bids


The systems of comparison are described in:
Project management: comparison of bids.
Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Comparison of
multiple prices.
Other prices of estimate
Complementarians field to the basic data:

The date and the IPC, which will operate the price. The suggest
button shows alternatives to adjust the price.
Prices in other unit of measurement are described in Budget:
Other fields of concepts.

Estimate by basic elements


Amount of each concept broken down by natures. To see a breakdown of other pricing structures, add the desired columns.
Estimate by hours
It displays the most important values of resources of manpower and
equipment, according to the estimate.
Estimate by statuses
Estimate amount with full breakdown by approval states of the takeoff lines.
Estimate and target
Comparative study between the sales estimate and the cost estimation.
The application of cost overrun general percentages make differences
between groups of amounts, described in paragraphs Estimate and
Economic planning.
Layouts of certifications and stages
Planning
Breakdown by stages or certifications of the cost target.
Resources and procurement groups
Concepts of type supply with the necessary data to make purchases
and contracting or controlling their deviations.
Menus and options 193

Certification
Actual and cumulative certification data, compared to the estimate.
If you do not wish certify with take-off lines, certification can be entered in this window:

Directly at each stage, in multiple fields to the right as


QtyCert or PerCertEst, of the Stages table.

Globally for the work item, entering the QtyCert quantity or


the certified percentage PerCertEst of the Relations table.

Globally for the chapter, with its percentage PerCertEst of


the Relations table. This percentage is passed on all their
work items that have not take-off lines or quantities in certification stages.

Certification by statuses
It displays the certified part of each state of the estimate.
Each certification status contains the part of the certification corresponding to each state of the estimate, so full certification is the sum
of the states.
You can add to the layout the predefined default user PerCertEstPossible that indicate the certified percentage over the possible estimate.
EVM Earned Value PM
Data used to determine the progress and expected final status of the
work from the information normally know the address of the work.
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto, under Certifications.
Incomes and expenditures
Amounts provided for certification and planning respectively. May be
seen globally or by month.
Production
Data used to determine the production.
All are valued at estimate price, so you can directly compare.
If exists some part not certified without production, its possible obtain as the difference between certification and certified production.
Cost control
Data required for knowing actual costs and deviations.

194 Manual de Presto manual

For only the deviation in cost, the actual cost of each concept should
be compared with the estimated cost of the part executed so far
(earned value), i. . RealTgt and Real. Data for the concepts show
the unit cost and relations are the total cost, but the deviation is the
same.
The amount allocated shows the sum of allocations of the concept in
their destinations, calculated basis on supply prices, and is an alternative to the actual cost, based on the weighted average price.
EVM Earned Value
Data used to determine the progress and expected final status of the
work from the information normally known construction company.
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto, Recruitment and
Ordering, invoicing and control section.
SIE Production and Cost
It lets economic monitoring of the project for months, showing the
amounts of the most relevant data to deduct gaps between the certification and production, and between expense and cost.
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto, Recruitment and
Ordering, invoicing and control section.
Projects integration
Allows you to manage estimates and works seamlessly. Check Presto
at the stage of project: An information system: Integration works.
Subordinate windows
Text
Main text of the concept, which is printed in the estimate. You can
associate other text files from the thumbnail window.
Activities
Quantities and amounts broken down by activities. Check VIEW: Activities and certifications.
Stages
Quantities and amounts of different pricing structures, disaggregated
certifications. Check Show: Activities and certifications .
Stages and activities
Take-off lines associated to the relationship between the concept and
its superior. Refer to VIEW: Take-off lines.

Menus and options 195

Thumbnails
Files associated with the concept. Check Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Additional Project Files.
Children
List of inferior concepts.
Keywords
List of keywords or parameters associated to the concept, with the
operation described in VIEW: Keywords.
Diary
Prices of a work
Concepts that have prices in a linked project or in an entity pricing.
Check Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Integration of works: In the center of the linked data works and VIEW: Prices.
Prices
Prices concept works on the linked entities or pricing. See Presto at
the stage of project: An information system: Integration of works: In
the center of the linked data works and SEE: Prices.
Estimate
The layouts, the subordinate windows and the use are equal to Tree
window, excluding about hierarchical windows.
Active concept
Link to tree window
The icon is located in the upper left of the window. Helps the active
concept in this window automatically adapts to the chosen in the
Tree window, which can be open simultaneously. Refer to FILE:
Working environment: General: For details of the concept of header.
Parametrics
Generate concepts derived from parametric. In all other concepts,
showing its text and its lower concepts.
Automatically opens when you double click on the windows of the
estimate over a parametric concept.
To insert in the estimate the concept derived from the marked combination use Copy icon and use Paste in the place of destination.
196 Manual de Presto manual

Subordinate windows
Children
Decomposition of the derived concept from a parametric.
Text
Active concept text or concept derived from a parametric.
Code lines
Parametric concept generation rules, in price tables not compiled.
Concepts
List type concepts price of the work. The windows Activities, Institutions and Management Systems show other concepts.
Layouts
All: Budget
Basic data of the concept.
All: Other prices
It displays almost the same fields as the Other estimate prices layout
from Tree or Estimate window.
All: Extended data
Displays the category and the number of concepts upper / lower.
Work items: Measurements
Most useful values of the work items for estimating.
Materials and other: Budget
Concepts of type material and others, with its category and total
quantity.
Manpower: Budget
Concepts of manpower with their total quantity.
Equipment: Budget
Concepts of equipment with its total quantity.
Work item: Budget and objective
Work items, with the comparison between estimate and target.
Concepts for hire
Concepts that can be hired, according to their estimated quantity, as
the target.

Menus and options 197

Labor and machinery in phases


Concepts of manpower and equipment that have total quantities in
the estimate or in the target and therefore can be used in the planning and resources adjust. See Resources subordinate window.
Supplies contract orders
Concepts of type supply with the necessary data to make purchases
and contracting or controlling their deviations.
Supplies
Concepts of type supply with the data obtained during the execution
of the project.
Supplies of materials
Supplies of material type with the total quantities necessary to track
the project.
Supplies to purchase
Purchased supplies with the amounts required to monitor during the
execution of the project.
Stocks: Consumption by imputation
Concepts of type supply consumed by imputation, with stocks calculated by the program.
Stocks: Consumption per target
Concepts of type supply consumed by target, with stocks typed by
user.
You can also change the coefficient of theoretical consumption and
lack score detect whether a production concept.
Destination
Concepts of type target with theirs real prices and quantities.
Concepts off estimate
Concepts that are not part of the decomposition of other concept.
Subordinate windows
Text
Main text of the concept. See Use Interface: Windows text.
Thumbnails
Files associated to the concept. Check VIEW: Files.
Resources
Quantity in what is necessary each resource of the project, for days,
198 Manual de Presto manual

calculated with For days, months and years option of PROCESSES:


Calculate resources.
For easy reference, it also shows the intermediate dates, but the resource does not need them.
Keywords
Keywords or parameters associated to the concept, with the operation
described in VIEW: Keywords.
Parents
Concepts that within its decomposition have the active concept.
It lets easily check the performance and amount in their superiors.
If concepts are added in this subordinate window, the active concept
is included in the breakdown of each added concept with the indicated quantity.
Children
Inferiors concepts to the active one.
Supplies
Apparitions of the concept as supply in the various documents. It is
especially useful in filtering schemes for supplies. Check Show: Supplies .
Allocations
Appearances of the concept as destination of allocations, manuals or
created during the calculation for the concepts consumed by target.
It is especially useful in the layout that filters the destinations. Check
VIEW: Supplies.
Prices
Prices of a concept in the pricing entities or in the linked works. Check
VIEW: Prices.
Diary
Activities
List of concepts of Activity nature mainly used in take-off lines.
To view data by month or stages that correspond to the fields chosen
in multiple fields, you must add the activities to the decomposition of
a chapter, and to avoid duplication of the amounts, the amounts
thereof shall be annulated.
Menus and options 199

Layouts
Summary
Code, number and description of the activity, with icons that indicate
the types of associated information.
Estimate
Estimate obtained from the activities of the take-off lines.
Other prices of estimate
Estimate supplementary columns, which allow to obtain other
amounts or ratios based on the values entered in the UnitAltFactor
field.
Estimate by basic elements
Amount of the estimate of the activities broken down by nature.
Estimate and target
Comparative study between the sales estimate and the cost estimation by activities.
Planning
Breakdown by stages or certifications of target cost of each activity.
Certifications by basic elements
Amount certificated of activities broken down by natures.
Certification
Certified amount of activities broken down by certifications.
Estimate by statuses
Certification by statuses
Amount of estimate and certification of activities, broken down by
approval states of the take-off lines.
Incomes and expenditures
Comparison between planned and certified amount of activities. May
be seen globally or by certifications.
Production
Amount of the total, planned and planned production of the activities,
valued at estimate price.
Cost control
Actual amount of activities broken down by certifications.

200 Manual de Presto manual

Subordinate windows
Work items
Work items that contains take-off lines of each activity, with their estimate quantities and amounts.
The shown work items derived directly from the stages table, so it is
not necessary to recalculate the activities.
The program calculates the approximate duration of the work items
associated to more than one activity, in proportion to their relative
quantity. Due to rounding, the sum in days may be not match to the
total length.
Resources
Necessary quantity of each resource for each activity. It is calculated
in PROCESS: Calculate resources, with By activities option
Entities
Concepts that correspond to building agents, suppliers and pricing
entities.
The general operation, fields and subordinate windows are identical
to those described for the concepts window.
Layouts
All
All entities, with their identifying information.
Data agents
Suppliers and other agents of the building, with their identifying information.
Invoicing
Details of payment method, tax percentages and deductions, contra
accounts and accounting of expenses.
Suppliers (amounts)
Suppliers economic data.
Promoters (amounts)
Economic details of the type customer entities.
Price assignment entities
Entities of bidder type and price, allowing you to assign prices to concepts as described in Presto at the stage of project: An information
system: Comparison of multiple prices.
Menus and options 201

The grey entities are not added to the compared layouts.


Diary
Hierarchical window with a calendar that shows information of the
project that can be associated with dates:

Amounts of the scheduled prices structures (planning, certification and execution), calculated with CALCULATIONS: Takeoff lines.

Project financial details, which are calculated with


CALCULATIONS: Documents.

Necessary resources by dates, which are calculated with


PROCESS: Calculate resources.

Concepts and files associated to a date.

Nature of the elements of the diary:


N Type
1 XXI

NatC

Use
Sum of all years.

2 Year

Sum of every month.

3 month

Sum of all days.

4 Day

Day does not correspond to a stage of


certification.

5 Certification

Day of one stage of approved certification.

5 Certification

Day of the last stage of approved certification.

5 Certification

Day of one stage without approved certification.

The N field indicates the numerical value of the Diary.Type field.


Icons of the field Info are described in Use Interface: Layout: Columns of information fields.
When there is information associated to a date, appears also associated or totalized at higher levels, as the month and year.
Double -click on an amount that comes from documents, opens the
corresponding window, filtered by that date.

202 Manual de Presto manual

Holiday
The holidays are not taken into account in the temporarily planning.
The background of the icon is red.
Labor day
Day as laborable, with grey background.
Certification
Day corresponding to a stage or certification.
Not a certification day
Day does not correspond to a certification stage.
Current certification
The values of the later stages do not intervene in the calculations.
Layouts
They are similar to those of the Dates window, except that in Diary
are not shown the layouts related to periods or stages.
Planning
Useful layout for creating the economic planning by manual annotation of percentage or weight of expense in each certification, or by
using any of the alternatives proposed by the suggest button in the
WeightPlan field.
Check Presto in the planning stage: Economic planning: Fill economic
planning.
Planning by approval states
Planning and production provided by states of approval.
Planning and certification
Costs and revenues forecast, and certification.
Breakdown by natures
Anticipated costs and revenues by natures.
Certification by statuses
Tracking certifications by the direction of the project:

Amounts of certifications disaggregated by the estimate approval states.


Planned quantity in each period, valued at estimate price for
comparison.

Menus and options 203

Production
Amounts of production and certification, to estimate price.
EVM Earned Value
Project tracking in cost and time, from the point of view of the construction company.
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto the Recruitment
and ordering, invoicing and control section.
Documents
Administrative track by document types.
Invoices
Control of invoicing, with deductions, taxes, payments and collections.
Receipts and payments
Receipts and payments by state, with the balance of the period and
cash flow.
Subordinate windows
The diary information is exclusively associated to days. When placed
in months or years or in the root concept, the program shows the set
of information associated with every day covering that period.
The text is excepted, which is unique and may be associated with any
date.
Text
Text associated to the date.
Thumbnails
Associated files to date or period. If files are dragged over this window will be remain associated to estimate in its file date, not to the
current date or the day.
Maturities
Maturities of the date or period.
Concepts by date
Concepts whose Date field matches the chosen period.
In this window you can choose layouts to see:

Concepts of type price.


Concepts of management systems.

Records for monitoring management systems.

204 Manual de Presto manual

Resources
Displays the required amounts of each concept to execute the work
within the period specified in the selected schema (phases or dates).
Are calculated with PROCESS: Calculate resources, For days, months
and years.
Concepts
Concepts that are of economic information by certifications, by
months, years, and in general, that have information for periods of
the diary.
In this window you can choose layouts to see:

Certification

Production

Supplies

Destination
Suppliers (amounts)

Promoters (amounts)
These layouts show the type of information mentioned in similar, with
the difference that here are associated concepts with periods.
Dates
Calendar as a list, similar to the Diary window. You can filter by any
field, allowing you to see only natural days, months, certifications or
years.
Layouts
Layouts with the name equal to the Diary window has the same
content, except that it also shows the accumulated fields to origin.
Stages: Planning
Useful layout for creating the economic planning by manual annotation of percentage or weight of expense in each certification, or by
using any of the alternatives proposed by the suggest button in the
WeightPlan field.
Check Presto in the planning stage: Economic planning: Fill economic
planning.
Stages: Planning by approval states
Planning and production provided by states of approval.
Stages: Planning and certification
Costs and revenues forecast, and certification.
Menus and options 205

Stages: Breakdown by natures


Anticipated costs and revenues by natures.
Stages: Certifications by approved states
Certification by states and provided certification.
Stages: Repricing
Amounts required to submit a certification according to regulations.
Check Presto in project management: Certification: Official certifications.
Stages: Production
Production and certification amounts, all valued at estimate price.
Stages: EVM Earned Value
Project tracking in cost and time, from the point of view of the construction company.
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto the Recruitment
and ordering, invoicing and control section.
Month: Documents
Administrative track by document types.
Month: Invoices
Control of invoicing, with deductions, taxes, payments and collections.
Month: Receipts and payments
Receipts and payments by state, with the balance of the period and
cash flow.
Days
Every day of the diary.
Months
All months of the calendar. It let setting the rate of inflation.
Subordinate windows
Are the same as the Diary window, except the following:
Work items
It displays the work items with information associated to a stage, so in
the dates window, you must have activated any of the stage layouts. If
you want to display the columns for the amounts of any of the financial documents, must be included manually, until getting the desired
columns layout.

206 Manual de Presto manual

Gantt chart
The time schedule described in Presto in the planning stage: Temporary Planning. The following schemes can be combined with filter
options tasks:
Summary
Basic information about the task.
Durations
Data for calculating durations by time and cost.
Display planned dates
Total duration and estimated dates resulting from the calculation.
View clearances
Dates and clearances resulting from the calculation.
Natural dates
Estimated dates calculated as correlates working days, and amounts.
Display real dates
Real dates and executed percentage.
State type tasks
Dates for each of the states.
Tasks listing
This window displays the tasks in a list, filtered and sorted by different
criteria, without relation to the structure of the estimate.
The behaviour is almost identical to Gantt Chart and their layouts:
Summary type tasks
Estimated dates and duration of the tasks of summary type.
Summary type tasks (real dates)
Estimated dates and actual dates of the tasks of summary type.
Calculated dates
Quantities and durations of the planned tasks.
Calculated dates (clearances)
Dates and clearances of the planned tasks.
Dates calculated (resources)
Estimated dates calculated as correlates working days, and amounts.
Calculated dates (real dates)
Real dates and percentage of execution.
Menus and options 207

Critical tasks
Critical path tasks, without clearances.
Dates from superior
Estimated dates of tasks of type floating.
Economic planning
Tasks located on the dates of your economic planning.
State type tasks
Dates for approval statuses for each task.
Planned
All schedulable tasks currently included in the Gantt chart.
Unplanned
Schedulable tasks not currently included in the Gantt chart.
All
All schedulable tasks.
Resources by groups
Displays the resources previously calculated by PROCESS: Calculate
resources, marking one of the options On stage, grouped by, and
its content is the basis for building contracts.
Scheduled by stages are obtained and in the multiple fields to the
right quantities or amounts are shown, depending on the layout is.
The fields in this table cannot be edited, but you can delete entire
lines.
Layouts
All
Resources disaggregated by groups with their total quantities.
Quantities
Resources disaggregated groups, with the planned quantity in stages.
Amounts
Resources disaggregated by groups, with the amounts in stages.
Groups
Groups resulting from the calculation of resources, with the amount
planned for each stage and group.
Pending contracts
Groups resulting from the calculation of resources and whose contracted quantity is less than the total quantity of the target. The uni208 Manual de Presto manual

tary and total price in the estimate and target, and amounts planned
by stages are displayed. The default option of contracts creation is
based on the contents of this table.
Contracts
This window and their subordinate windows allow you to enter the
contracts and their supplies, in order to ask bids to the suppliers,
compare it and choose the contractor.
Check Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and purchasing.
Each layout of the supplies subordinate window corresponds to layout of the same name in the main window.
You can drag supplies from the subordinate window of a contract to
another, for example, to split or consolidate contracts.
Layouts
All
All contracts.
Without suppliers
Contract without associated suppliers.
Not awarded
It lets associate suppliers, request pricing, compare and awarding
contracts.
Awarded
Contracts with awarded supplier, with their amounts of planning and
contract.
Cost control
Amounts of planning, award, certification and execution of contracts.
Orders
The orders are purchase orders sent to suppliers.
The general explanation of the process of cost control and the documents contained in Presto for the construction company Turnover:
Records of economic control.
Delivery orders
Documents accompanying to supplies when received at the work.

Menus and options 209

The general explanation of the process of cost control and the documents contained in Presto for the construction company Turnover:
Records of economic control.
It is considered that a supply has been purchased if is in a delivery
document or in an invoice.
Works assignment
Documents that help to write allocations of concepts in destinations
and do not represent purchases.
Internally, work assignments are documents of delivery without supplier and its code appears in the Delivery field.
The general explanation of the process of cost control is contained in
Analysis of costs and expenses.
Work assignments while calculating the costs, in concepts of consumption by target, are automatically generated.
Invoices
The general explanation given in Presto for the construction company Turnover: Records of economic control.
Subordinated window
Are the same for all documents, except the following:
Maturities
Dates, amounts and method of payment agreed for an invoice.
Supplies
Supply concept relationship types that appear in documents of economic management. The complaints which are parts of work (not
supplier deliveries), but not including supplies contracts.
Grayed non-editable fields that are not taken into account, as the fate
of supplies consumption by purpose or other documents supplies
parts work.
Double click on the field in a document, opens the corresponding
window filtered by that document.
In this window you can delete complete supplies, as well as create,
delete or rename the documents directly associated with each supply
that be editable, with the same effect as if working in the specific
window. If the last of the documents which include the supply is deleted, it disappears completely.
210 Manual de Presto manual

The context menu allows unfolding supplies, or change the type of


consumption.
Layouts
All
Supplies that are in orders, deliveries or invoices.
Orders
Supplies that are in orders.
Procurement
Supplies that are in deliveries or approved invoices.
Supplies in pending documents
Supplies that are in deliveries and unapproved invoices or orders.
Supplies in issued invoices
Supplies that are in customer invoices.
Valid inputs to cost centers
Valid allocations of supplies.
Supplies not used
Supplies not consumed.
Maturities
All Maturities of the work. Double click on the Invoice field opens
the filtered invoices for that document. Check Presto for contractors:
Invoicing.
Variables
It contains a variety of internal data of the work. Not the root concept
nor in : An information system: Presto at the stage of project data
and general properties of the work are included.
Layouts
Correspond to the different types of variables.
Common to all projects
General variables used internally by the program.
Reports and templates
Variables of the used reports and templates, with the latest answers.
Wizards
Variables of wizards used with the latest answers.

Menus and options 211

Revit
Parameters generated by the Cost-It complement, with the properties assigned in the model.
User
It allows user to define custom variables for each project.
All
All variables.
Uses of the variable
This subordinate window displays the Presto reports, templates and
wizards in which the active variable are used.
Variable inspector
This icon generates the list of components, through all the reports,
templates and wizards that are accessible in their corresponding directories, more user-specific ones.
Files
List with all files associated to the project.
Check Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Additional project files.
Layouts
All
Each file appears only once.
Graphic files
Files of type graphic. Each file appears only once.
Not associated
Files that have been without associating to concepts or documents.
Associated to concepts (all)
Each file appears as many times as is associated with concepts.
Associated to concepts (spec texts)
Text file type associated concepts. Each file appears as many times as
is associated with a concept.
Associated to contracts | orders | deliveries and work assignments |
invoices
Type text files associated with each type of document. Each file appears as so often is associated to the document.

212 Manual de Presto manual

Window subordinate Thumbnails.


Displays thumbnails of the associated files.
Gallery
It is accessed by double-clicking an associated file in the Thumbnail
window or the Files window.
If the file is text, their behaviour is right for text windows.
When a graph contains the following actions are available:
Action
Double click with the mouse
wheel.
Mouse wheel.
Click and drag.
Drag with the mouse wheel.

Result
In drawings, zoom by extension.
In pictures, zoom by extension and
1:1 size, alternately.
Increases and decreases the zoom.
Zoom by window.
Displacement.

Keywords
Key words or concepts associated with the work, you can write or
copy of price tables.
Also function as parameters or additional properties to the concept,
allowing associate more structured information or from other files
and formats.
Using terms like support for searches
They can be used for:
Filter and sort criteria available in this window.

Include in the search filter for words.

Use of terms to add properties to the concepts


The user can associate a keyword to a concept, contract or entity, and
assign any value to each of them, which is linked to the concept and
specific keyword.
This powerful and flexible use allows to add an unlimited number of
properties not available in the tables.
Using expressions in columns user can display the values listed, or
even operate with other values of concepts, considering that the values are alphanumeric data.
In the Expression builder are two Presto functions specialized in keywords management:
Menus and options 213

keywordvalue: Gets the value for each concept and term.

keywordtype: Indicates whether the value is calculated or userwritten.

Using terms like BIM model parameters


The integration between BIM and Presto models allows associating a
wide variety of properties or parameters to the concepts, using them
as keywords. Parameters can be associated to concepts using [F7]
Suggest, as it shows existing parameters and variables, created for
example by the user or from Revit.
Refer to Variables window, especially as regards the Revit layout
(Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Data and general project settings).
Fields terms
Keywords.Code
Concept code associated to a descriptor.
.Keyword
Descriptor associated with a concept.
.Value
Alphanumeric information associated with each concept and keyword.
You can score securities to be converted later into numbers. This case
is to be used as the point similarly decimal expressions Presto.
.Element
Subtype of family or identifier of the take-off line, which allows to
know which element belongs each parameter or keyword.
.Type
0: Inserted by user. 1: Generated by Presto.
Relations
List with all relationships between higher and lower concepts. Provide
inquiry and global operations over fields of relations.
By eliminating a concept in windows that show relationships, such as
this one and estimates, just go away your relationship with superior
concept. The concept of the work disappears only if it is removed
from the last relationship, unless listed as supply or cost center into a
document.

214 Manual de Presto manual

Layouts
Chapters and work items
Relations that support measurement and certification.
Take-off lines between two work items
Relationships between two work items.
Concepts and QMASS
Relationships where the lower concept is QMASS type.
Contracts
Relations between contracts and supplies.
Activities and certifications
This window shows all the set of activities and certifications or stages
of the whole work, and their layouts refer to specific of the subordinate windows that are described below in the activities and certification or stages, except the following:
Activities (chapters)
Certifications (chapters)
It shows the data of stages table by activity and certification respectively, and serve to eliminate calculated value that cannot be removed
otherwise.
Activities (subordinate of estimates)
This window displays the quantities and amounts of active concept,
broken down by activity.
Only the activities that have content for active concept and cannot
modify the results, are shown.
Layouts
Estimate
Summary data of activities, including internal number associated to it.
Estimate by statuses
Quantities and amounts of activities, broken down by estimate approval states.
Certification
Quantities and amounts certified in each activity.
Certification by statuses
Quantities and amounts certified of the activities, broken down by
estimate approval states.
Menus and options 215

Production
Amounts of estimated total production, planned, actual, certification,
certified and non-certified production of the activity, all valued at estimate price.
Stages (subordinate of estimates)
This window displays the quantities and the amounts of active concept, broken down by stages of certification.
For easier viewing and data entry, in these layouts defined certification all stages lines are presented, even without content.
If you directly enter quantities, associations of take-off lines to that
stage are lost. These lump sums never be broken down by activities or
approval statuses.
Layouts
Evolution of estimate and target
Historical values of the estimate and target calculated for each approved certification. This way you can see the evolution of the estimate along the execution.
Fields are calculated if there is any content for the approved certification. The blue ones correspond to the certifications before than approved, and the magenta to approved ones.
Planning by approval states
Breakdown of planning by certifications and states of approval.
Planning and certification
Breakdown by certifications of the planning, estimated production
and certification.
Certification
Quantities and amounts of each certification.
Certification by statuses
Data for each certification, which correspond to the various approval
states of estimate.
Certifications by quantities
Comparison between the quantities of planning, certification and actual execution of each certification and cumulative to origin.
Production
Planning, production, certified and non-certified production, all valued at estimate price.
216 Manual de Presto manual

Cost control
Quantities and amounts of the corresponding certificates to the planning, the actual execution and the allocations to cost centers.
EVM Earned Value
Earned value data disaggregated by the hierarchical structure of the
project.
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto the Recruitment
and ordering, invoicing and control section.
Stages and activities
This window shows the take-off lines associated with the relationship
between the concept and its superior. The general process described
in Presto in the design stage: Measurements.
This information is seen in two types of windows, with the following
features:
Main window menu VIEW
It contains all take-off lines of the estimate, in order to facilitate verification and global operations.
Go to work unit
This option provides access to the work item to which the take-off
line belongs, because it sets as active in the estimate windows.
Subordinated window of the Estimate window
It contains the take-off lines of the active work item.
Shared layouts by the two types of window
Estimate
Lines belonging to any state of the estimate, except the annulated,
with the basic fields of take-off lines.
Estimate: Identification fields
Estimate lines with fields coming especially from BIM models.
Economic planning
Take-off lines associated to a planning stage.
Estimate and planning
Take-off lines belonging to the estimate or are associated to a planning stage.

Menus and options 217

Estimate and certification


Take-off lines belonging to the estimate or are associated to a certification stage.
Certification
Take-off lines associated to a certification stage.
Certification: Identification fields
Take-off lines associated to a certification stage, with fields coming
especially from BIM models.
Production
Take-off lines associated to a stage of certification or execution.
All
All take-off lines.
All: Identification fields
All take-off lines with subtotals for all stages, especially with the fields
of BIM models.
Exclusive layouts of Take-off lines main window
Approved and pending
Filter the take-off lines whose status is indicated by the layout.
Take-off lines references
References between work items set to Same measurement option.
Drawings DWG | Allplan | Revit
The content of each of these layouts is set to the information contained in the program where come, filtered by the content of the
TakeOffLines.Origin field.
Temporary measures
Check Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Importing take-off
lines.
Layouts
New work items
Take-off lines of the reference pertaining to work items that will be
added to the project.

218 Manual de Presto manual

Variations on estimate
Variations on planning
Variations on certification
Measurements where be difference in estimating, planning and certification, respectively between reference and project.
Take-off lines to transfer
Take-off lines that are to be transferred to the work.
Take-off lines to remove
Measurements that are not listed in the reference but in the work.
May represent a reference extract, or may have been deliberately removed. The user must decide what action to take based on the prosecuted goal. If not removed, while transferring the take-off lines will be
eliminated in the work.
All
All lines of temporal measurement.
Prices
Prices main window shows the complete list of alternative prices
and other data associated to a concept, which is stored in the Prices
table.
The use is described in:

Prices for references and bidders that are described in Presto


at the stage of project: An information system: Comparison of
multiple prices.
Supplier Prices for contracts described in Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and shopping.

Amounts in other estimates and connected works in Presto at


the stage of project: An information system: Integration of
works: Works linked.
The Prices subordinate window, shows this information for all entities of the active concept.

Subordinated window Prices of a work shows information of all concepts associated to an entity or linked project.
On the track header you can check if a field of the window is the only
value of concepts table or multiple value with the same name of the
table Prices.
Menus and options 219

Layouts
Prices
Relations between entities of type price and concepts.
Offers
Relations between vendors and concepts.
Prices in work type entities
Relationships between projects and concepts of type price and
QMASS.
Data in work type entities
Relationships between projects and entities, such as suppliers and
agents of the building.
Suppliers
Relations between providers who have contracts and concepts.
All
All relationships between entities and concepts.
Prices (subordinate)
Layouts in estimates windows
In price assignment entities
List of entities of type bidder or price, and the values associated with
each of them to the concept.
In contracts
List of suppliers that have offered the concept in contracts.
Concepts schemes window
Prices in other projects
Concept quantities and prices relating to the estimate in the different
linked projects.
Documents in other projects
Concept amount in the various documents of economic management
in the linked projects.
Prices of a work
This subordinate window is in the estimate windows and in the entities. Its especially designed for use in a central of integration of pro-

220 Manual de Presto manual

jects, as shown for each linked project the data indicated in the several layouts of the window.
Layouts
All
All concepts.
Quantities and prices
Concepts with their total quantities, prices and amounts.
Contracts
Global data of contracts awarded in the project.
In documents
Quantities and amounts of the concepts in the documents of economic management.
Entities and suppliers
Amounts resulting from economic management.
QMASS
List of operations and controls of the management systems.
Check description
It compares the description of the central project concepts with those
of the linked projects, displaying those are different.
Messages
Text window with messages, notifications (blue) and errors (red) issued.
If an option generates repetitive messages, are output only the first.

REFERENCE
This menu provides quick access to the users projects or other help
references for drafting the estimate.
Estimates, price tables and catalogues on the Internet
The content is updated through Internet, and the user has not control
over its content.
Estimates defined in the users working environment
This group includes Presto files:

Working environment: Directories: Projects.

Working environment: Directories: Reference.

Working environment: Database prices.


Menus and options 221

Directories accessible by Presto Server.

The menu content is updated each time the execution of Presto starts,
and is limited to 512 entries.

TOOLS
Operations that affect the estimate as a whole, including all pricing
structures. Each is described where used.
CAD
Check Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Take-off lines of
CAD drawings.
Replace concepts
Concept update
Check Presto in the design stage: estimate: estimate Organization .
Regenerate parametric
Check Presto at the stage of project: Estimate: Parametric concepts.
Operate with prices
Adjust price
Check Presto in the design stage: Estimate: Pricing and quantities.
Reduce levels
Restructure breakdown
Check Presto in the design stage: estimate: estimate Organization .
Restructure take-off lines
Check Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines: Take-off Lines.
Working with Text
Translate text
Refer to Use Interface: Windows of text.
Operate with graphics
Operate files
Refer to Complementary files to the project.
Cross-check two projects
Check Estimate: Analysis and checks.
Parametric
See Technical Questions on the website of Presto, section Estimates: Working with price tables concerning the development of
parametric concepts.
222 Manual de Presto manual

PROCCESS
Operations affecting concrete prices structures, such as those of the
target, and are described in the process where they are used.
Generate target
Update target decomposition
Restructure target decomposition
Consolidate work items
Break down work items by activity
Break down work items by decomposition
Check Presto in the planning stage: Economic Planning.
Create dates and certifications
Check Presto in project management: Certification.
Fill economic planning
Check Presto in the planning stage: Economic Planning.
Copy certifications
Check Presto for contractors: Production.
Fill agenda items
Some functionalities related to the diary and concepts need doing
this action.
Fills in procurement groups
Calculate resources
Check Presto for contractors company: Purchasing and subcontractors.
Create contracts
Check Presto for contractors: Purchasing and subcontractors: Recruitment and purchasing.
Create invoices
Check Presto in the planning stage: Financial Planning and Presto
for contractors: Invoicing: Invoices.
Link work
Update information
Update documents

Menus and options 223

Export documents
Check Presto at the stage of project: An information system: Integration of works and Presto for contractors: Centralized invoicing.

PLUGINS
They are independent programs of Presto that perform specific tasks
in the projects.
Appear in this menu .EXE and .VBS files contained in the directory
indicated in FILE: Working environment: Directories: Plugins, and
executables that are in the directory specific user.
To avoid unwanted interference, previously close any open projects
with other versions of Presto.
Develop plugins
Plugins can read and modify any data of the work. Users who want to
write a plugin must know some programming language capable of
interacting with the automation server available in Presto, such as
VBScript.
The server has many features for facilitate the reading and editing of
these projects, such as its creation and opening, positioning in tables,
reading and insertion of records and fields, and so on.
To access the automation server is needed:

Have run Presto at least once on the computer that you are
going to program.

Start the application by creating an object of the PrestoApplication class.


In www.presto.es, section "Service request", examples and documentation for these functions.

CALCULATIONS
Stages and activities
Recalculates all results dependent changes in the take-off lines. Check
Presto in the design stage: Take-off lines.
Prices
Recalculates all results dependent changes in prices and quantities.
Check Presto in the design stage: estimate: Pricing and quantities .

224 Manual de Presto manual

Planning
Recalculates all results dependent changes in the bar chart. Check
Presto in the planning stage: Temporary Planning .
Documents
Recalculates all results dependent changes in the content of the documents. Check Presto for the construction company: Invoicing: Records of economic control.
Real costs
It recalculates all results that depend on allocations of costs and expenses.
Check Presto for contractors: Analysis of costs and expenses.
Calculate all
Recalculate all results.

REPORTS
This chapter describes options that allow:

Generate results on screen or printed using predefined or custom reports.

Generate documents from Word and Excel templates.


Export reports to other formats such as PDF, RTF and TXT.

Create new reports or modify existing ones.


Reports are files with the .PrestoReport extension. Each file contains
a thumbnail of the first page, which is visible from Windows Explorer
whenever Presto is installed on that computer. If you change the report layout thumbnail is generated again from the active project.
Choose reports
The REPORTS menu in the main window displays and allows Presto
print reports and templates that are in the directory reports and templates, and user-specific directory.
The directory can be changed in FILE: Working environment: Directories.
The menu content is updated each time the execution of Presto starts,
and is limited to 512 entries.
Print report or template
The dialog box lets display the report, export it or print it directly. It
allows you to choose reports and templates located in any directory,
Menus and options 225

showing the thumbnail if the appropriate option in the dialog box is


selected.
Preview
It shows the report final aspect. The header options lets tour the report on different scales and execute the printing, complete or by pages.
If a report exceeds the width of a page, more pages are generated,
except that the remaining area is less than the width of the right margin.
Debug
Displays the name of each control rather than its result, which facilitates the design or modification of reports.
Each section displays with a characteristic background colour, except
the section has its own colour, making it easy to detect their limits,
even if they have printable content. The colors of nested sections,
such as Element, are shown in different shades of the same basic
tone.
Templates of Excel and Word documents
The structure of the templates described in Service request web of
Presto, Connecting with Word and Excel section.
Word template
It is used as a basis to generate a Word document with project data.
The desired expressions must appear in a Word template, with the
resources and the usual syntax of Presto.
When you execute the option a new Word document is created, you
can freely change.
To expedite the process, and depending on the version of Word used,
it may be appropriate:

Disable spell checking.

Do not use the Windows clipboard while the template is generated.

Save the template in Print Layout.

Turn off the Word Use smart cut and paste if in the generated document appears words without space between them.

226 Manual de Presto manual

Excel template
It is used as a basis to generate an Excel workbook with a predefined
structure, whose cells are filled with project information, similar to
Word templates.
If a plugin named Presto in the template, it runs after export.
automatic reporting
Specific instructions for the design are in Design Report of the manual.
Design report
This option or icon gives access to the Report Layout window. When
run from a window table automatically creates a report containing the
visible columns and applied filters, except the filter words. In the hierarchical mode, takes into account the levels chosen in the dropdown
list.
If there is an active sub window, the report also prints the elements
thereof relating to each of the principal.
The result is a report similar to that displayed in the windows of Presto content.
Automate customizing reports
They can reuse the properties of a report used as a base, because new
reports automatically applies them many of their properties.
The baseline report should be in the template directory, and its name
should be Template.
The properties of each section are copied to the following positions:
Section
Prologue
Start
Header
Master page
Foot
Final
Epilogue

Goes to the same section of the report


Before
Before
Before
Overlayed to the content
Behind
Behind
Behind

Menus and options 227

Export
Sets file characteristics resulting from the export of the report. The
FILE: Export option is available in the window to design reports, and
has the same functionality.
Format
PDF
The Entire document paper size generates a single page with the
necessary dimensions to enter the entire report, only one header and
one foot. Its especially suitable for printing large documents, such as
the Gantt chart. If you choose the User size you can directly set the
width and height.
RTF
In this format, which allows you recovering with Word the result of
the report, different styles are assigned to each section, allowing you
to easily modify the generated document. Rectangles are not exported.
Paper sizes are the same as the PDF format.
TXT
It generates a plain text without format for importing in other programs. The reports must have an ordered structure of fields, without
overlaps.
Specific options allow this format:

Fill in spaces in blank to create the distance between the fields.


If the previous option is enabled, you can also set the number
of lines on each page and the number of characters or columns of each line. If too many characters to the right will
overlap to the start of each line.

If its not activated the previous option, you can choose a


fields separator. If you need fixed length fields, format each
field as desired.

If there is a selected separator of fields, not page breaks are


generated.

Export the header and footer on every page of the report, only
once or none.
The file can be added to the end of the file of the same name.

228 Manual de Presto manual

WINDOW
The different combinations of windows allow convenient access to the
most common ways to use the program.
Save sets of tabs
Redefine a combination of windows taking as the current model.
Set [1..5]
Each set is a combination of windows that is useful for some of the
most common processes of the program.
Retrieve original tabs
Reassigns the original combinations of Presto.

HELP
Presto manual, activation status of Presto Modules, and other aids to
the user.
Activation
HELP menu option showing the code and authorization system detected by Presto.
The list of modules, has a Use column that allows deactivate available modules, thus being free for other network users.
In order Presto works, you must have successfully activated the modules for the purchased license.
The information regarding the installation and activation process is
available in the Installation Guide of www.presto.es.
Activate
It makes the process of activating of the modules through an Internet
connection.
If this connection is not available or is restricted, see Activation file
described in the Setup guide.
Internet / Motherboard
Choose this option if you have a license for any of these authorization
systems.
Internet activation
This authorization system is activated in each session by checking the
server of Presto, which is renewed periodically. It can be used on any
computer, but not simultaneously.
Menus and options 229

The license is stored in the file Presto.LicInternet.


Activation by motherboard
This authorization system is linked to the computers motherboard.
No virtual machines are supported. Only the Internet connection is
required during the initial authorization.
The license is stored in the file Presto.LicMotherboard.
Physical device
Connect the device to the appropriate port of your computer and
continue with the activation process. If necessary, will be installed the
control software of this device.
The license is saved in Presto.LicUsb.
Connect to the network license server (PrestoNetActivation)
This option is used to activate an individual license or a workstation,
accessing a system of licenses for multiple licenses.
Get the IP address and port number where the configuration file located PrestoNetActivation.cfg , where the license is stored.
Control user access
If you have a user control system, e-mail and password for each request. If the identification is positive, are activated automatically assigned to the user modules.
The whole process of creating users and passwords as well as the individual allocation of modules is done through the customer area in
www.presto.es
Activation files directories
Program
Presto

Directory
Example
Configura- \Users\xxx\AppData\Roaming\Presto
tion
PrestoNetActivation Presto setup \Program Files\Presto 2015
PrestoServer
Other options
Presto Manual
Access to this manual.
Notes to current version
Clarifications on the latest version.
230 Manual de Presto manual

FAQ database
Access a database with queries and suggestions of Presto.
Send inquiry to Presto
Send a query to the system data that may affect the operation of
Presto, and responded to the registered user.
www.presto.es
It provides access to the website of Presto.
User licenses
It displays information of the protection.
License agreement
It displays the license agreement.
About Presto
Software version and corporate information.

Menus and options 231

232 Manual de Presto manual

Tutorial of estimates
For the development of this tutorial, the program settings should be
the default at installation. When in doubt, delete the users profile:
Presto150.PrestoPerfilXml
The directory where is displayed is in FILE: Working environment:
Directories: Configuration.
The FILE: Working environment: Generals: Show data from header
concept option is disabled, so the active concept is always the concept
where the cursor is in the middle of the table.

1 Creation of concepts
Lets make an estimate, with take-off lines and certifications.
Create a new project
We will create a new project called COURSE:
1 Select FILE: New.
2 Check the directory in which to save the project and change it if
you wish by clicking Path.
3 Type COURSE in the Name box, choose <None> in Template,
and accept. Note that in the title of the main window is the project
name.
4 Open VIEW: Project settings window and in the Data option,
enter the following values:
Summary
PostalCode
City

Casa en Humanes
28970
HUMANES DE MADRID

Create the structure of chapters and work items


To move to the field on the right, you can use the [Enter] key on the
numeric keypad or the [Tab] key. To go directly to the next line use
the [Enter] key of the alphanumeric keypad.
Lets create some chapters and a work item.
In the Estimate window:
1 Enter 01 in the Code field or press [F7].
Tutorial of estimates 233

2 Go to Description field and write EARTHMOVING.


3 Go to the bottom line and enter 03 in the Code field.
4 Write FOUNDATIONS in the Description field.
5 Repeat to create chapters 04: | STRUCTURES and 05 | CLOSING.
6 Double-click on any field in the first chapter to get into its decomposition. The chapter goes to the head. Add the work item:
Code
Summary
E02EM030 Trenching

QtyEst
48,08

Unit Est
m3 13,00

The work item amount is calculated as the product of the quantity by


the price and has a yellow background, indicating that it is a noneditable field.
Create subchapters
Access to the context menu

with the right mouse button.

The chapter 04 | STRUCTURES will be divided into two subsections,


concrete and steel:
1 Ascend to the chapter with a double click on the header (grey
band), double-click on this chapter and add the following:
Code
04
04H
04A

Summary
Structures
CONCRETE
STEEL

QtyEst

Unit Est

1
1

2 The icon of the NatC field indicates that these concepts were
created with nature Work item. On this field of 04H concept
choose the nature

Chapter and do the same for 04A.

Breaking down the work item


We will create the inferiors of E02EM030 | Excavation in trenches.
1 Place that work item on the header by double clicking on it.
2 Complete the work item with the following information:
Code
E02EM030
O01OA070
M05EN030

Summary
Trenching
Mason
Hydraulic excavator

234 Manual de Presto manual

QtyEst
0,125
0,250

Unit Est
m3
h 12,00
h 42,00

3 Up one level with double click on the header and note that the
price of the work item is magenta, indicating that it is the result of
a calculation.
Add a text
We will complete the description of this work item by adding a text.
1 Click the Text icon in the toolbar of the Estimate window.
2 In the Text window type:
Trenching, on firm ground, by mechanical means, without charge
or transport to landfill.
3 Select the text you just added, click the Text colour icon from the
toolbar of the text window, and select a different colour.
Duplicate a concept
We will double the previous work item to create a similar without
writing all over again.
1 Choose Duplicate over the Code field of the concept
E02EM030.
2 Change the proposed code by E02PM030.
3 In the new work item, change the contents of the field Description by:
Digging wells
4 In the Text window, replace trenches by wells.
5 Close the Text window.
Changing prices and quantities
The concept O01OA070 | Bricklayer is contained in the decomposition of the two work items.
Write 13.09 in his Est field and see how it changes the amount of
both.
To reflect the differences between trenching and well, change the
performances and the take-off of the new work item.
Code
E02PM030
O01OA070
M05EN030

Summary
Digging wells
Mason
Hydraulic excavator

QtyEst
6,93
0,130
0,260

Unit
m3
h
h

Tutorial of estimates 235

Each concept figure once in each project and the changes of data that
define it, as price, description or unit, affecting the entire project.
However, the concept quantity in the breakdown of another is a
property of the relationship between them, and the same concept can
be part of many relationships with other parents, each with a different
quantity.
Concepts of percentage type
The decomposition of an item may contain concepts that represent a
percentage of the other concepts, representing auxiliary means or otherwise.
We will add a percentage to the E02PM030 work item.
1 Add after the work item decomposition a concept with code
%AUX03. Note that QtyEst contains the price of the work item
divided by 100, in magenta.
2 In the Summary field type aids and in Unit type %.
3 To increase 3% of price, type in Est, 3.
The percentage concepts act only on the decomposed located above.
Once defined a concept of percentage, you can use it in other decompositions, with the same percentage.
Indirect costs
If the work CURSO is subject to the Law on Public Sector, we can directly incorporate the indirect costs allowed.
1 In VIEW: Project settings select the Calculate option.
2 Type 5 in Percentage of indirect costs of estimate and click Accept.
Notice the AmntEst field of both work items reflects the change.
Open a reference
A reference is any other Presto project that is open while working on a
project.
Open a prices database.
1 Select FILE: Projects.
2 Click on Reference\ESP directory, located in Presto setup directory, and see the project it contains.

236 Manual de Presto manual

3 About the project Extracto del cuadro de precios Centro select


Open as read only.
Copy a concept from a price table
A concept is selected by pressing the numbered box on the left.
1 In the reference, double-click on:
Code
E
E02
E02A

Summary
Decomposed prices
Improvement of land
Cleaning and clearing

2 Select the concept E02AM010 | Land clearing and cleaning machine and copy it to EDITING: Copy.
3 Go to Estimate window of the COURSE project and place in the
header section 01 | EARTHMOVING.
4 Move to a blank line and insert the concept with EDITING: Paste.
5 Write 61.52 as the estimated quantity for this work item.
The copied work item has the price in magenta colour, as it is calculated, and can be modified without affecting the original concept of
the reference.
Copy more concepts from prices table
Repeat the above process by taking the necessary work items of the
prices table and dropping in the work COURSE until it has the following contents:

Tutorial of estimates 237

Copy concepts of another project


You can copy work items from any other project, or even whole chapters:
1 Open the project CursoControl in the directory Tutorial\ESP.
2 Copy the chapter SANITATION
3 Insert it into the COURSE project.
4 Close the references.
Sort concepts
To drag a concept, select it, click the left mouse button on any point of
the line and release the button at the desired target line.
Lets change the order of work items in the chapter 01.
1 In the Estimate window place in the header section.
2 Select the work item E02AM010 | Land clearing and cleaning machine.
3 Drag the line to the first position.
Repeat the process to sort the list of chapters.

238 Manual de Presto manual

Auxiliary prices
We will create an auxiliary price, inserting a decomposition to the
concept A02A080 | Cement Mortar 1/6 m-40, which is the only work
item of 05 | CLOSING chapter.
1 Place the auxiliary in the header.
2 Complete the following data, and note while typing concepts code
of existing concepts in the project, its content is automatically
populated.
Code
A02A080
O01OA070
P01CC020
P01AA020
P01DW050
M03HH020

Summary
Cement mortar 1/6 m-40
Mason
Cement
River sand
Water
Concrete mixer

QtyEst
1,700
0,250
1,100
0,255
0,400

Unit
m3
h
t
m3
m3
h

Est
13,09
95,20
15,70
0,71
2,00

3 Ascend by double clicking on the header and check the auxiliary


price now is a calculated price. The auxiliary code is the grey background to differentiate it from the undecomposed concepts.
Displacements in the project
Learn to navigate by the work until you understand its structure and
gain confidence with the different ways to navigate into Presto.
1 Use EDITION: Next and EDITION: Previous to see the breakdown of all work items in the chapter 01.
2 Click on the concept to the left on the path set on the head of the
Estimate window to access to the root concept.
Access to the VIEW: Tree window and browse by the project, using
the tools to start levels.

2 Take-off lines
Justify the quantities of the work items.
Create take-off lines
You can use [F9] to copy the upper field and [F7] to retrieve the values
of the top fields in the same column.

Tutorial of estimates 239

We will create the work items take-off lines of chapter 01 |


EARTHMOVING.
1 Click over Take-off lines icon in the icons toolbar of the Estimate window.
2 Set as active concept E02AM010 | Land Clearing and cleaning machine.
3 In Take-off lines subordinate window, display Activity list and
select Act0010.
4 Enter the following lines, using the aids referred to in the previous
note:
Activity
Comment
Act0010
North zone
Act0010
Floor
Act0010
Path
Act0010
Irregular area
Act0010
Garden area
Assigning of activities

N
1
1
1
1
1

Length
3,00
8,00
3,00
7,02
2,00

Width
3,50
3,00
2,00

Height

7,00

The activities serve to organize the take-off lines of one or more work
items in groups.
1 Set as active concept E02EM030 | Excavation in trenches.
2 Extend the Activity list and select +2 to create the Act0020
activity.
3 Enter the take-off lines that are in the following image associated
with this activity. Write directly the Comment field as the last activity of choice is automatically associated.
4 When you get to the take-off lines associated to another activity,
repeat from step 2.
5 Repeat the process for the following work items, reusing existing
activities.

240 Manual de Presto manual

Measurements by activity
We want to know the quantities and amounts correspondent for various activities.
1 Note that in each work item appears automatic subtotals ever
change the activity assigned to their lines.
2 Access to the window VIEW: Activities and renown the activities
as follows:
Code
Act0010
Act0020
Act0030

Summary
Previous operations
Explanation
Trenches and pits

3 Activate CALCULATIONS: Calculate all and observe the amount of


each activity, including the assigned lines in all work items.

Tutorial of estimates 241

Checks the work items that make each activity opening the Work
items subordinated window.

3 Completion estimate
Refine the results.
Note a different price from calculated
We will introduce a price that does not reflect to the result of decomposition.
1 Choose Block in the Est field of E02AM010 work item. Its
colour changes to red indicating that it is not the result of its decomposition.
2 Type 1 in its field Est.
3 Scroll down to see the breakdown and check what remains.
To retrieve the calculated price must choose
of the work item. Do not do it yet.

Unlock on the price

Undo changes
You can undo everything done at any time of the making of the project.
1 Choose EDITION: Undo twice consecutively.
2 Note that the price of the previous work item returns to be calculated.
Make a backup
We will make a backup of the current state of the project.
1 Press FILE:Save and FILE: Close.
2 Select FILE: Projects and locate the current project.
3 Choose

Copy over the project.

4 Choose

Paste and get the new project Copia_Curso.

5 To rename, choose
CURSO01Seg .

Rename in the project and type

6 Maintain in the original work, choosing


ject.

Open on COURSE pro-

Setting the estimate to an amount


We will reduce the amount of the estimate in an overall percentage.
242 Manual de Presto manual

1 Choose TOOLS: Adjust price.


2 Enter 95 in the % box. The new amount appears in Adjust estimate price to ... .
3 Check the boxes of quantity of manpower and equipment and the
box price of materials. Uncheck any other box.
4 Click Accept.
The estimate is set at indicated percentage, by changing the values in
the set, so that they remain valid the decompositions
Window concepts
Lets see the list of arches used in the estimate.
1 Open the CHECK: Concepts scheme Materials and others: Budget. All concepts of the work with these natures appear.
2 Write P03B* in the mask box and press [Enter]. It appears only the
concepts whose code begins with these initials.
3 To redisplay all concepts enter the * character.
Add agents of the building
Layouts are chosen from the dropdown list to the left of the top of
each table window.
We will introduce the details of developer, designer, project manager
and builder.
1 Open the VIEW: Entities, Data agents layout.
2 Add the following agents:
Code
ENT0001
ENT0002
ENT0003
ENT0004

Nat
Promoter
Proyectist
Builder
Work director

Summary
Jos Cenzano
Laura Lita
Enrique Cimiento, S.A.
Jos Manuel Garca

Title
The property
The architect
The contractor
The building engineer

3 Select the nature of each entity using the context menu on its field
Nat.
4 Close the Entities window.

Tutorial of estimates 243

4 Printing and connection with other programs


We consider the estimate COURSE finished, so we proceed to print it
on paper, or export to PDF, RTF, BC3 or Excel format.
Before printing recalculate the work through the CALCULATIONS:
Calculate all option.
The reports to use are in the REPORTS: 01 Estimates and take-off
lines menu, and also find Excel and Word templates, which are identified by their icons.
You can modify the print margins in FILE: Working environment:
Margins.
Print measurements and estimate
1 At the site above, choose the report Estimate and take-off lines. It
appears a box with some questions.
2 Answer D to the question refers to the encoding type. Note that
concepts codes are correlative.
3 Click Preview. The report is displayed.
4 Press > to see the following pages.
To modify the answers press Return button.
Print the summary of the estimate
Repeat the above procedure with the Summary of estimate.
To include the percentage of overhead and industrial benefit, like a
project of public procurement:
1 In VIEW: Project settings select the Calculate option.
2 Enter 6 as % of industrial profit, and 13 % as overhead.
3 Return to preview the report.
To change the % VAT go to VIEW: Project settings, Accounting
option and change the value of Percentage of VAT on construction
works.
You can preview or print the other reports of REPORTS: 01 Estimates
and Take-off lines menu.
Customizing reports: insert a logo in the header
To show a logo in the header of every page:
1 Go to REPORTS: Design report.
2 Press FILE: Open.
244 Manual de Presto manual

3 Select the Summary of estimate report on the reports subdirectory 01 Estimates and take-off lines, and press the Open button.
4 Extend 2 or 3 cm the Header section scrolling down the bottom
edge.
5 Select all the controls in this section. To do this, position the cursor
on the left ruler up to the first control, and when its shape changes,
click with the left mouse of button and drag down to cover all controls. While releasing the button, it will be all selectioned.
6 Move them down to free up site by clicking the Down arrow key
repeatedly.
7 With TOOLS: Image create a square in the upper left corner of
the section, and double-click to open their properties.
8 Type 4 in the Width property and 2 in the Height.
9 Press the suggest button in the File property and select Logotipo para informes.PNG in the subdirectory Tutorial\ENG.
10 Check the result with FILE: Preview.
11 Select FILE:Save as and save the report with the name Summary
of estimate with logo in the same directory as the original, and
close the reports design window.
Export reports to PDF or RTF formats
You can export reports to RTF format to open them with a text editor
such as Word, and customize the document with the editor tools. To
export:
1 Instead of pressing the Preview option, click Export.
2 In the Export dialog box there are several properties. In Format
there is a drop down list where you can choose from available.
3 The remaining properties are setup paper size, print pages, location of the file to export, and so on.
Export/Import Excel format
To export to Excel the estimate:
1 Select FILE:Export: Excel.
2 In Levels choose Chapters and work items.
3 In Structure select Estimate.
4 Check Export text and Export take-off lines if you wish to export
the long text and take-off lines respectively.

Tutorial of estimates 245

5 Press the OK button. It will appear an Excel workbook with the


Presto project estimate. Save it as Book1.xls.
To import with Presto an Excel file:
You can import the Excel files which were exported with the previous
option.
You can edit in Excel summary, price, quantity or take-off lines.
1 Close the open projects and create a new project whose name is
CopiaCursoExcel.
2 Choose FILE: Import: Excel, and double-click in the file Book1.xls
exported previously.
Save and close the project with FILE: Save and FILE: Close respectively.
Export/Import format BC3
To export the project CURSO to this format:
1 Reopen COURSE project.
2 Select FILE: Export: BC3 and save the file in the directory proposed.
To import a project or a database prices in BC3 format:
1 Close the open projects and create a new project whose name is
CopiaCursoBC3.
2 Choose FILE: Import: BC3.
3 Select the Curso.BC3 file exported previously. Press the Accept
button.
Close the project saving changes.

5 Certifications
We will introduce some certifications in the COURSE project.
Certifications are correlative numbers, which correspond to the dates
assigned as certification day in the Dates window. The removal or
insertion of days of certification does not remove their contents, but
that moves between ones dates and the others.
Management dates
We will create a schedule of certifications and remove a date, as an
example of the procedure.

246 Manual de Presto manual

Create a calendar of certifications


1 In the Estimate window, select the layout of columns and filters
Certification.
2 Active PROCESS: Create dates and certifications, introducing the
following responses:
Initial day:

actual date

Day of certification:

31

Number of months:
12
In the months that have not 31 days, the latest possible date is created.
Delete a certification date
We will remove one of the dates of certification created.
1 In the VIEW: Dates window, choose
first date of certification.

No certification on the

Indicate the current certification


1 Choose Current certification on any field in the third certification. Note that the fields that identify change its colour.
2 With the same system, choose as current the first certification, to
continue the tutorial.
Certification by certification lines
Create the first certification reusing estimate lines
We will certify the work item E02EM030 of the chapter 01 from its
estimate take-off lines.
1 In the Estimate window, place the work item as active concept.
2 In the Take-off lines window select Estimate and certification
layout.
3 In StageCert field of the first take-off line select the value 1 to
indicate that it was made during the first certification.
4 Repeat this process for all take-off lines of explanation, selecting
the lines and displaying the list of stages once.
Stick with the first certification with different lines to the estimate
Then, we will certify the work item E02AM010 of the chapter 01
through lines of independent take-off lines of the estimate.
1 In the Estimate window, place the work item as active concept.
2 In the Take-off lines window select the layout Certification.
Tutorial of estimates 247

3 Enter the following take-off lines and select the value 1 in the
StageCert field of all:
Activity
Previous operations
Previous operations
Previous operations
Previous operations
Previous operations

Comment
North zone
Floor
Path
Irregular area
Garden area

N
1
1
1
1
1

Length
2,50
7,50
3,00
7,02
2,00

Width
3,60
2,90
1,75

Height

6,00

Print certification
1 Use CALCULATIONS: Calculate all to ensure that all amounts are
updated.
2 Select REPORTS: 05 Certifications: Certification with take-off lines
report. Answer the questions and click Preview.
3 After checking the results, select Print.
Create the second certification
Lets start the second certification of the work item E02EM030.
1 Certify as before all take-off lines corresponding to footings, indicating 2 in their field StageCert.
2 In the Dates window, specify now that the current certification is
the second.
Certify vby stages
We will certify typing the total quantity certified in the month.
1 Place the work item E02PM030 as the active concept.
2 Open the Stages subordinate window, Certification layout.
3 Enter 2.50 in the QtyCert for initial certification, 1.50 in the second and 2.90 in the third.
4 Recalculate the project and observe the results in the Dates window.
Summary certification
We will print the summary with a low bid of 5%:
1 Open VIEW: Project settings, option Calculate.
2 Enter 0.95 in the low auction and accept.
To print the description:
3 Choose the report 05 Certification: Summary of certification.
248 Manual de Presto manual

Cost tutorial
This tutorial is a guide to estimate the project cost before bidding,
purchasing management and calculation of their actual costs. In reality, each user wants to control different aspects and, therefore, should
establish their own rules and procedures.
This tutorial assumes you are familiar with Presto Estimates.
The windows used in this tutorial are generally open from the VIEW
menu or their equivalents icons.
Before analysing the results or printing reports, calculate the project
with CALCULATIONS: Calculate all option.
Open the CursoControl project, found in the Tutorial\ESP directory.

1 Estimate of estimated cost


We will complete the data relative to the dates of the project.
1 Go to Project settings: Times window.
2 Fill in the start date with the first working day in April this year and
the date of the end of work any day in November and close the
window.
3 Choose PROCESS: Create dates and certifications, type 8 in
Number of months and click Accept.
4 Open the Dates window, Stages: Planning and certification layout.
5 Choose

No certification on the first two certifications.

6 Select as current certification the first, using


tion on that date, and close the window.

Current Certifica-

7 Open the Entities window, Data agents layout.


8 Observe the existing agents and close the window.
Create a estimate of costs (target)
As the estimate is already calculated, we are going to create a proportional target to the same.
1 Open the Estimate window, Estimate and target layout.
2 Choose PROCESS: Generate target.

Cost tutorial 249

3 Verify that is chosen as a concept that will regenerate the root


concept of the project, CONTROL, and select Generate target.
4 Write 70 as a percentage in the four natures, and click Accept.
Note that the estimate quantities are copied unchanged to the target
and that the prices of the single components have the appropriate
value.
Different decomposition in estimate and target
The composition of E03ALA010 | Arqueta walk downspout work
item of the estimate is not adequate, because we outsource the manpower providing us the material.
Annul the indicated amounts of target and add the last line, so that
the decomposed matches the following:

Observe the new price-target of the work item.


Reports of economic planning (target)
Preview the following reports under paragraph 01 Estimates and
Take-off lines, selecting 4 value in response to the question Price:
1 Est | 3 Real | 4 Tgt

Decomposition list by chapters.

Estimate and take-off lines.

Also use the report Estimate and target in 03 Financial planning.


Accrue the target (planning)
We want to prevue the rhythm at which costs will produce of the project. We will use an approximate time distribution, bell-as a Gaussian
250 Manual de Presto manual

curve. We are going to fill in the WeightPlan field, with the weight
that each certification will have on the total amount of the project.
1 Open the VIEW: Dates, Stages: Planning layout.
2 Select WeightPlan column by clicking in its header.
3 Press the suggest button on any of the selected fields, and choose
the value of the Gaussian distribution option.
4 In PROCESS: Fill economic planning check Applying planning
weights from each certification and accept.
5 In Tree window, access to Planning layout and select the level
of work items in the dropdown list top to the left.
6 In multiple fields should contain QtyPlan and Plan fields, and
1 in Stage dropdown.
Check the monthly distribution of the estimated cost of each chapter
and work item. Note that the target is the sum of all the planned
stages. When the project is in progress, is called planning to the sum
until the current certification or approved stage.
Reports of economic planning (planning)
Preview the reports in 03 Economic Planning:

Chapters and work items with stages.

Quantities or amounts by months.

Planning of revenues and costs.

2 Purchases
Preparation of contracts.
Project with contracts
It automates the grouping of supplies in contracts and associate them
default suppliers. We will add a group for manpower to be subcontracted.
1 Open the project Base de datos de proveedores of the directory
Reference\ESP.
2 Observe its structure; each chapter corresponds to one of the lots
or purchasing families on which will be subdivided the project.
3 Create the new chapter S | SUBCONTRACTED MANPOWER.

Cost tutorial 251

Associate suppliers to purchasing groups


We will create two suppliers of manpower and associate to the previous chapter.
1 In the Entities window, Data agents layout, add:
Code
40000031
40000032

Summary
Sumano
lvaro Bautista

Email
City
sumano@tel.es Villaviciosa
Madrid

PostalCode
28670
28001

2 In the Estimate window, insert the two suppliers as inferiors concepts of the chapter created in the previous section.
3 Save your changes and close the purchasing groups.
Choosing the concepts to purchase
The concepts that are going to be bought or subcontracted directly
must be marked as supplies.
1 In the Estimate window, choose
first work item of the first chapter.

Supply on the code of the

2 Notice how the icon indicating the type of concept remains in orange.
3 Check as supply equally the remaining work items of the first, third
and fourth chapters, and the concepts of decomposition of the
work items of the second and fifth ones.
Associate the purchasing group to each concept
To make the process of sorting and searching of suppliers, each supply must be associated with a purchasing group.
1 Open the Concepts scheme Concepts for hire window.
2 Choose PROCESS: Fills in procurement groups.
3 Check Table of contracts, and with the Suggest button on the
right, select the Database suppliers box, and click accept.
4 Observe that has filled the Group field of the different concepts.
5 To change the group of the concept P01LT020 | Perforated brick,
press the suggest button on its Group field and select [E07]
WALLS AND DIVISIONS.
6 Repeat the process with the concept P01LV105 | Brick face view.
7 Assign the O01 value to Group field of all concepts of manpower type, that are not in the database of suppliers.
252 Manual de Presto manual

8 Replace E02A, E02E, E02P and E02T groups by E02, in order to the four concepts later appear in a single contract.
9 Similarly, replace the groups E04C and E04S to E04.
Calculate the necessary resources to execute the project
This process is the basis for contract creation.
1 Choose PROCESS: Calculate resources.
2 Remove all but the options marked For stages, grouped by and
Purchasing group, and accept.
3 You can see the resources created in the VIEW: Resources by
groups window.
Create contracts
Lets create contracts that group the supplies needed to perform the
project.
1 Open the Contracts window.
2 Choose PROCESS: Create contracts, uncheck A contract by
stage and accept.
3 In the Date column of generated contracts type that they were
created two months before the start of the work.
4 Add MANPOWER as a description of the contract O01, that is
not of the suppliers database.
Contracts appears in red status, indicating that they are not satisfied,
and therefore cannot perform some calculations and do not appear in
some reports.
Change the status of nonconforming contracts selecting

Black.

Add suppliers to bid a contract


We will indicate the suppliers who we ask prices.
1 Choose Search and associate suppliers on any field of contract
E07 | WALLS AND DIVISIONS.
2 The first suppliers, with more intense background, come from the
suppliers database and the others are from the project itself.
Check and uncheck the Contracts box to see the difference.
3 In the Act column, select the suppliers 40000003 | Insulation
Castilla, 40000004 | Cecasa Ceramics and A82698762 |
TECHNICAL CERAMICS Henares, SA, and accept.
Cost tutorial 253

4 Notice in Supplies subject window the new columns that appear


to the added suppliers.
5 Repeat all steps associating suppliers to the listed contracts.
Contract
E02
E04

E05H

Supplier
40000005
40000006
40001101
40000011
B80480304
40001101
40000011
A28403772

Summary
Desmontes Aguilera
Excavaciones del Monte
Architectural concrete
Valcinsa
ACERALIA PERFILES MADRID, S.L.
Architectural concrete
Valcinsa
HORMIGONES DEL JARAMA, S.A.

Remove offers of a contract


We will remove a supplier of a contract.
1 Place in the Supplies subordinate window of the contract E07 |
WALLS AND DIVISIONS.
2 Choose Eliminate bid at the head of the column Price, supplier A82698762.
3 Note that the columns have disappeared from this offer.
Modify supplies
Lets modify the quantity to be contracted from a supply.
1 Go over the contract O01 | MANPOWER.
2 In QtyTgt field, enter 14.09 for supply O01OA030 | First officer
and 9.64 for O01OA060 | Specialized pawn.
Add clauses to a contract
We will complete the contract specifications with a text.
1 Place in the contract S | SUBCONTRACTED MANPOWER.
2 Open the subordinate window Text and type:
If the subcontractor fails to comply with the deadlines a penalty of 0.5
% of the initial estimate for each day of delay will be applied.
Request prices to bidders
We will prepare the requests for prices to be sent to different bidders.
1 Select FILE: Export: Price quote.
254 Manual de Presto manual

2 In format, choose Presto project and accept.


3 In the directory labelled as Destination will have generated as
many Presto projects as suppliers involved in the contracts. If a
supplier is involved in more than one, your project will have a
chapter for each contract.
If the supplier email figure in its field Email also generate an email
with each bid, which must be closing or saving one by one.
Importing received prices from suppliers in Presto format
The company Valcinsa has sent their prices for both contracts in
which it participates.
We will proceed to import.
1 Select FILE:Import: Price quote.
2 Double click on the project Supplier offer! 40000011, located in
the Tutorial directory.
3 Note that contracts E04 and E05H have incorporated the prices
offered by that supplier.
Input prices offered by suppliers manually
We assume that the remaining suppliers have submitted their bids by
other means.
1 Change in the contract E07 and indicate the prices submitted by
each bidder for each supply.
Summary
Face brick
Perforated brick

Price
40000003
92,00
35,00

Price
40000004
85,00
40,00

2 Repeat this operation on contracts E02, E04 and E05H with


the following prices, respectively.
Summary
Transport to landfill
Excavating machine wells
Excavating machine emptying
Clearing and land clearing

Price
40000005
8,26
10,97
10,55
0,38

Price
40000006
7,53
10,00
9,62
0,35

Cost tutorial 255

Summary
Pitching limestone
Reinforced concrete slab
Reinforced concrete footings
Concrete cleaning
Summary
Forged inclined deck
Reinforced concrete slabs on
grade
Forged double beam
Reinforced concrete bands
Reinforced concrete in beams
Reinforced concrete pillar

Price
40000011
4,43
11,32
92,70
61,86

Price
40001101
4,77
12,19
99,83
66,62

Price
B80480304
5,03
11,60
92,37
67,11

Price
40000011
19,67
222,21

Price
40001101
22,78
257,29

Price
A28403772
22,71
240,57

30,62
340,09
392,37
162,59

35,45
393,79
454,32
188,27

34,80
368,70
421,78
177,93

Remember to calculate all to update the results.


Award the contract to a supplier
To complete the hiring process is necessary to decide its contractor.
1 In the Supplier field of the Contracts window click Suggest
button of the contract E07 to see your suppliers.
2 Select the supplier 40000004 and accept.
3 Repeat the above steps assigning to the supplier 40000006 the
contract E02 and to the supplier 40000011 the contracts E04
and E05H.
Prepare the order
1 Choose Transfer to order over E07 contract. P0001,
P0002, P0003 and P0004 orders are created for their supplier,
with the supplies to the offered price. An order is generated for
each stage in which supplies are needed.
2 Open the Orders window and delete the orders P0002, P0003
and P0004, which so far are not going to perform.
3 Press the suggest button on Date to indicate that the order is
placed on 12 March.
256 Manual de Presto manual

Reports of contracting and purchasing


Preview the reports in 07 Procurement section:

Comparative contracts.

Contracts signed.

Concepts contracted and orders.

Firm orders.

3 Invoices
Documents of economic management.
Record an invoice and their supplies
We receive 00342 invoice for 40000006 | Mount Excavations supplier and dated March 22. We will note including the detail:
1 Open the Invoices window and enter the main elements of the
invoice:
Document
00342

Entity
40000006

Summary
Excavaciones del Monte

Date
22/03

2 In the Suppliers window, type the detail of the invoice:


Code
Summary
E02AM010 Clearing and land clearing
E02EM030 Excavating machine emptying
E02PM030 Excavating machine wells
E02TT040 Transport to landfill

Quantity
61,52
48,08
6,93
143,00

Unit
m2
m3
m3
m3

Price
0,35
9,62
10,00
7,53

IVA
18
18
18
18

The VAT fee of the invoice is calculated depending on each supply.


Warranty withholding
Complete the invoice indicating your warranty withholding, writing
5 in its field WithldngWarr.
The withholding amount is subtracted from the value of the BaseInv
field.
Add maturities
The invoice Amount field is red, indicating its amount does not
match the maturities sum. Lets create a maturity.
Choose

Maturity 60 on any field of the invoice.


Cost tutorial 257

Open the subordinate window Maturities. Make sure that you create:

Amount to be paid 60 days after the date of invoice.

Warranty withholding with date 1 year later the invoice date.

VAT fee dated 20/04.

Mark maturity as paid


Note that the red colour is due (unpaid).
Choose

Black on the Note field of Maturity 60 (paid).

Complete the example


We proceed to type more invoices for completing the example.
1 Enter the same manner the following invoices.
Document
G2456
G4758
00074
M0027
X00345

Entity
40000011
40000011
40000004
46000001
40000304

Summary
Valcinsa
Valcinsa
Cecasa Cermicas
Own manpower
Hardware Fermax

Date
19/04
28/04
11/05
12/05
14/05

2 In the same order, enter each supplies.


Code
E04CM040
E04CA060
E04SA020
E04SE020

Summary
Concrete cleaning
Reinforced concrete footings
Reinforced concrete slab
Pitching limestone

Quantity
1,24
5,99
108,00
108,00

Code
E05HSA010
E05HVA030
E05HVA075
E05HFA060
E05HLA070

Quantity
5,44
16,74
7,20
240,00
0,90

Unit
m3
m3
m3
m2
m3

Price
162,59
392,37
340,09
30,62
222,21

E05HFS160

Summary
Reinforced concrete pillar
Reinforced concrete in beams
Reinforced concrete bands
Forged double beam
Reinforced concrete slabs on
grade
Forged inclined deck

124,23

m2

19,67

Code

Summary

Quantity Unit Price

258 Manual de Presto manual

Unit
m2
m3
m3
m3

Price
61,86
92,70
11,32
4,43

P01LT020
P01LV105

Perforated brick
Face brick

0,20
10,00

mud 40,00
mud 85,00

Code
O01OB050
O01OB060

Summary
Official brick maker
Assistant brick maker

Quantity Unit Price


200,00
h.
10,47
100,00
h.
9,82

Code
PX003
PX002
PX001

Summary
Tree level
Acrylic silicone pot
Steel nails

Quantity
2,00
12,00
20,00

Unit
unit
unit
kg

Price
17,00
4,00
11,50

Note in this last invoice that can be invoiced not previously existing
concepts in the estimate.
3 Create the maturities of each invoice with contextual menu and the
type indicated in the table.
Document
G2456
G4758
00074
M0027
X00345

Entity
40000011
40000011
40000004
46000001
40000304

Summary
Valcinsa
Valcinsa
Cecasa Cermicas
Own manpower
Hardware Fermax

Type of maturity
Maturity 30
Maturity 30
Maturity 60
Maturity in cash
Maturity in cash

Invoices issued to customers


We will issue to the customer the invoice corresponding to the first
certification.
1 Look in the Entities window, Agents data layout there is the
concept 43000015 | Promotions ESUCAP and its type is Developer.
2 Access the Invoices window, Customers layout.
3 As we have seen above, create 0045 invoice for 43000015 | Promotions ESUCAP developer, dated 30/4.
4 Enter the following supply:
Code
CERT1

Summary
Certification n 1

Price
2.000,00

Cost tutorial 259

5 Complete the example with the following invoices:


Document
0065
0074

Entity
43000015
43000015

Summary
Promociones ESUCAP
Promociones ESUCAP

Date
31/05
30/06

6 And the following supplies, respectively.


Code
CERT2
CERT3

Summary
Certification n 2
Certification n 3

Price
20.000,00
8.000,00

7 Enter maturities in cash at all.


Pro forma invoices
We will introduce a previsional invoice.
1 Type the following invoice:
Document
PRO5

Entity
43000015

Summary
Promociones ESUCAP

Date
31/07

2 With the following supply:


Code
CERT4

Summary
Certification n 4

Price
8.000,00

3 Choose Red on the Document field of the invoice, indicating


that it is a pro forma invoice.
Remember to recalculate the project.
Record the payment of a maturities group
The window VIEW: Maturities shows all the projects maturities.
We will indicate that the above maturity to July 1 have been paid.
1 Open the VIEW: Maturities window and check that it is sorted by
date.
2 Select all maturities with before the July 1 date.
3 Choose Black on the Note field of any of the selected lines.
4 Press CALCULATIONS: Calculate all.

260 Manual de Presto manual

Analyse amounts by dates


In the Diary window, Invoicing layout, you can see the invoicing in
each date and making annotations.
1 In theDescription field of the March 12 type:
First firm orders
2 Click on the Text icon in the toolbar and type:
Received contracts from various suppliers. They accept the
requirements. We spent the first orders.
Analyse the accounts state of the suppliers
In the Entities window, Suppliers (amounts) and Promoters
(amounts) layouts show the economic information from suppliers or
customers, and the invoiced amount, retained, paid, unpaid and VAT.
By clicking on the Supplies icon, in the icon bar of the window, you
can see the detailed list of supplies.
Analyse the purchases of a concept
The Concepts scheme Supplies window shows the concepts that
supply type in the work.
By clicking on the Supplies icon in the window icons bar, you can
see the detailed list of concept supplies.
Studying the project supplies
The window VIEW: Supplies shows the items that are in any document, where you can sort and filter by different criteria.
It also allows you to change some data without opening the corresponding document.
Reports of invoices and maturities
Preview reports of 08 Invoicing section:

Invoices and maturities.


Invoices by suppliers.

Maturities by dates.

4 Orders and deliveries


Presto has documents of order type and of delivery type or delivery
note. Its use is optional, and its operation is similar to the invoice
document type, except the part concerning to maturities.
Cost tutorial 261

Ordering
We will create an order manually, independent of the contracts.
1 Open the Orders window and close all others.
2 In the first empty line, type PX0103 in the Document field.
3 Press the suggest button on Entity and choose 40000001.
4 Then enter its Date issue is 24/02.
5 In Supplies press the suggest button over Code of each supply,
select successively:
Code
Unit Summary
A02A080 m3 Cement mortar
P01HA020 m3 Concrete HA-25/P/40/I

Quantity Price
10,00
44,80
0,14
51,01

6 Display the order you just prepared with REPORTS: 07 Contract:


Firm orders.
Note the complete delivery of an order
Concrete Horminasa delivery a week later all supplies of the order
accompanied by a delivery note:
1 Choose Go to delivery over the order PX0103.
2 Type EX0103 as code of the delivery.
3 Open the Deliveries window and watch the delivery was created.
4 Change the date of delivery so that it is 05/03.
5 Notice in the Order field of the Supplies its provenance.
Complete the example
Several days after we send 40000001 | Concrete Horminasa a new
order in which we ask the rest of the material we need.
1 Type the order PX0104 for the previous entity, dated 08/03.
2 Enter the following supplies.
Code

Summary

A02A080
P01AA020
P01HM020
P01MC010
P01MC040

Cement mortar
River sand
Mass concrete HM-20/P/40/I
Cement mortar M-100
Cement mortar M-40

262 Manual de Presto manual

Quantity Uni
t
5,17
m3
2,73
m3
0,16
m3
0,11
m3
0,22
m3

Price
44,80
10,99
49,01
37,10
32,90

Note the partial delivery of an order


Concrete Horminasa sends two days after a truck with sand. To record the receipt of this material:
1 Choose Transfer to delivery order on the supply P01AA020 |
River sand on the order PX0104.
2 Type EX0104 as code of the delivery.
3 Open the Deliveries window and change its date to 10/03.
Results

Open the Diary window, Documents layout and check the


amounts by date.

Open the Entities window, Suppliers amounts layout, and


check the amounts ordered and delivered.

Delivery reports
Preview reports of 08 Invoicing section:

Deliveries by date.

Deliveries by suppliers.

5 Calculation of actual costs


The cost calculation is from the supplies listed in cost documents (deliveries and / or invoices), the designated destinations and the production of the work items.
Designation of destinations
The first step before proceeding to study of actual cost of the project
is to determine which units will be produced (destinations or cost
centers) with purchased supplies. We will mark the first chapter as a
destination:
1 Open the Estimate window and close all other open windows.
2 Choose Destination on the code of the concept 01 |
EARTHMOVING. Notice that nature NatC changes its colour.
3 Repeat the previous step for all the chapters and work items of the
chapters 02 | SANITATION and 05 | ENCLOSURE.
Consumption of subcontracted work items
We have outsourced some work items that we will allocate its chapter.
1 Open the invoice 00342, supplier 40000006 | Mount Excavations.
Cost tutorial 263

2 Press the suggest button of the field Destination of its supply


E02AM010 | Land clearing and cleaning.
3 Select the destination 01 | EARTHMOVING and type 03/04 as
the date of allocation.
4 In the Estimate window, Cost control layout, open the decomposition of chapter 01.
5 Choose CALCULATIONS: Real costs and note the quantity and
amount allocated in the QtyInput and AmntInput fields respectively.
6 Assign to the supplies of the invoices 00342, G2456 and
G4758 the destinations and allocation dates as follow, respectively:
Code

Summary

Path

E02AM010 Clearing and land clear- 01


ing
E02EM030 Excavating machine
01
emptying
E02PM030 Excavating machine wells 01
E02TT040 Transport to landfill
01
Code

Summary

Summary

DateA
mnt
LANDS MOVING 03/04
LANDS MOVING 05/04
LANDS MOVING 05/04
LANDS MOVING 08/04

Path

Summary

E04CM040 Concrete cleaning


E04CA060 Reinforced concrete
footings
E04SA020 Reinforced concrete slab
E04SE020 Pitching limestone

03
03

FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS

DateA
mnt
21/04
21/04

03
03

FOUNDATIONS
FOUNDATIONS

22/04
25/04

Code

Path

Summary
Structures

DateA
mnt
28/04

Structures

29/04

Summary

E05HSA010 Reinforced concrete pil- 04


lar
E05HVA030 Reinforced concrete in 04
beams
E05HVA075 Reinforced concrete
bands
264 Manual de Presto manual

E05HFA060 Forged double beam


E05HLA070 Reinforced concrete
slabs on grade
E05HFS160 Forged inclined deck

04
04

Structures
Structures

19/05
19/05

04

Structures

24/05

7 Recalculate and observe the amounts allocated to each chapter.


Cost calculation until the current certification
1 In VIEW: Project settings: Calculations, check Consider only documents in approved stages option, so it does not take in account
the supplies allocations with later date to the current certification.
2 Note that the work items allocated to chapter 04 | STRUCTURES
during the month of May have not been accounted.
3 Open the Dates window, Stages: Planning and certification layout.
4 Choose the second certification as Current certification and note
that they are already counted.
Allocate one part of a supply
The supply E05HVA075 | Reinforced concrete bands, that have
bought in the G4758 invoice has not yet been allocated, and we want
to reflect that is placed 1 m3 at the end of April and the other on May
10.
1 Open the invoice G4758 of 40000011 | Valcinsa supplier.
2 Choose Unfold over E05HVA075 supply.
3 Enter 6.20 as the quantity to unfold. A new supply appears with a
quantity of 6.20 m3 and the previous will be reduced its quantity in
the same amount.
4 Select 04 | STRUCTURES as a destination for both supplies and
indicate that the old with a quantity of 1 m3 has been placed on
30/04 and the new with the rest on 10/05.
Recalculate and verify that there is not difference between supply
consumed at one time and this, which is consumed in several.
Consumption of basics concepts
The mechanism that will continue for the allocation of basic concepts
is the same as that followed for the allocation of outsourced work
items.
Cost tutorial 265

1 Open the invoice M0027 of supplier 46000001 | Own manpower.


2 Assign to your supplies the destination E07LSB040 | Factory perforated brick and the date of allocation 30/05.
3 In the Estimate window, Cost control layout, open the breakdown of the previous work item, in 05 | CLOSING chapter.
Recalculate and observe the amount of imputed supplies.
Analyse the allocations of a destination
In the Concepts scheme Destination window are all concepts of
target type.
Click the Allocations icon in the icon bar of the window to see the
supplies allocated to each destination.
Enter the production of certifiable work items
We assume that output equals the certification.
1 Choose PROCESS: Copy certifications.
2 Select Certification as Origin, Execution as Destination and
accept in order to the QtyReal field of the work items is same as
QtyCert. In Masked type *, and accept.
3 Type 115.00 in the QtyReal field of the E07LSB040 | Factory of
perforated brick work item, which is not certified.
Recalculate and note that the unitary actual yield of the officer and
assistant appears, considering purchases each and the produced
quantity of the work item.
Cost control reports
Preview the following reports under paragraph 01 Estimates and
Take-off lines, selecting the value 3 in response to the question
Price: 1 Est | 3 Real | 4 Tgt

Decomposition list by chapters.


Estimate and take-off lines.

Preview reports in 09 Cost analysis:


Allocations to cost centers. Check variants of this report, showing the aggregated supply and filter by date imputation.

Valuation of stocks.

266 Manual de Presto manual

Design report
This section contains the instructions to customize existing reports or
create new ones.
Common options with Presto explained in the chapters to Presto.
Contents of reports
Reports can incorporate any estimate information:

Elements of either table.


General data, which are in Project settings.

Any other value of the Variables window.

A report is a set of instructions for selection, organization and format


of the information to be printed of the estimate, structured in controls.
The controls are rectangles and can contain a fixed text, an estimate
field, a calculated value, images or lines. Controls are grouped into
sections.
A section is a horizontal band that contains controls with information
usually obtained from a Presto same table. The Header section, for
example, indicates the contents of the top of each page of the report,
while the Element sections fill the central zone of the page.
The information in each section is linked to the previous section by
establishing a relationship between them.
Link tables
To design a report you have to choose the table that contains the
desired information and associate that table to a section. Using a single table simple reports are obtained, such as lists of materials or
supplies.
To make reports with related data between two tables, as the list of
concepts and the files associated with each, you must open each table
in successive Element sections. The table of one section must share
some information with the table of the following.
The program prints each element of the table selected in one section
and then all elements of the table of the next section whose key satisfies the mask input to choose this table. Thus, the element for each
section acts as header or title of the elements of the next section.
In the example of the concepts and their associated files the sections
are:
Design report 267

Section
Element 1
Element 2

Table
Key
Concepts Concepts.Code
AttachAttachmentConcept.Code
mentConcept

Mask
Concepts.Code

Presto starts printing an element of section 1; then print all the elements of section 2 related with the element of the section 1, until
completion of all elements in each of the sections.
A table can also be chained itself; for example, the relations table can
be opened successive times to print nested hierarquical layouts.
Properties
The properties of the report, sections and controls are in Design Report: VER: Properties.
The expressions are written according to the rules that are in Expression builder.
Paste
It inserts in the point of the report where the cursor is located the
clipboard content, which may be the controls of the same or another
report:

If some control was selected before pasting, it does not eliminate or replace it.

If in the destination report is selected a section, paste it all the


controls. Otherwise, each control paste in its original section.
In the absence of this, it paste in the last section that it pasted
something.
If in any property of a control there is a non-existing variable in the
target report, remains in blank and a message appears.

File
Save protected copy
It saves the active report so that it can be used normally, but without
seeing or changing its design. A protected report cannot be unprotected, so you should save a copy of the original report.

268 Manual de Presto manual

Translate report
It makes a similar process to described in Translate text, translating
the literals that be in the expressions of:

The property Source of the text boxes.

The Question column in the Settings window.


The multi-language reports using the tr() function are translated
leaving the literal corresponding to the destination language.
Text strings that contain numbers are not translated.
It has its own dictionary in RTF format allowing you to customize the
translation using terms that the user wants.
After the translation, the user decides if saves the report.

VER
List of controls
It lists all the controls of the report, or only selected, with the section
to which they belong and the contents of the Source field. Under
each control appear all that depend on it, with Section field empty.
You can activate one or more controls by double clicking on the list,
which facilitates the location of the selected element.
Field list
Table with all Presto fields and the table to which they belong. You
can drag a field from this list to the report, creating a control that
appears with the adequate width to its content.
Decrease zoom 25%
Decreases the display size of the report.
Zoom 100%
It displays the design of the report at its natural size.
Increase zoom 25%
Increase the display size of the report.
Properties
If define the characteristics of the report, sections or controls. It also
opened by double-clicking on the element. If selected various controls, it can be changed all at once their common properties.

Design report 269

Colours
The colors can be chosen in the dialog box or by entering the RGB
colour, which are the red, green and blue components of a colour
additive system. Each index ranges from 0 to 255 and the number is
calculated by the expression:
R + (G x 256) + (B x 256 x 256)
Report properties
To see them, you click outside the report area.
Width
Width of the printed area of the report in cm. You can also move the
right edge of the report.
Grid X and Y
Number of vertical and horizontal grid divisions, measuring 1 x 1 cm.
Orientation
This orientation automatically changes the orientation of the printer
to print the report.
Columns
You can choose more than one column for reports to be printed in
large formats or oblong. The report design should have proper width
to resulting width of each column.
Repeat header and foot
In reporting more than one column, the header and footer can be
printed once per page or repeated for each column.
Common properties of sections
Height
Height in cm of the section. You can also move its lower edge.
Background style
The contents of the master page is printed below each section. If you
would not be printed in a specific section, do its bottom visible, even
white.
Keep together
It applies to sections Element, Search , Separator, Separator
end, End element and Final.

270 Manual de Presto manual

Option
No
The section

behaviour when the end of the page


What cannot be, goes to the next page.
If the section does not fit on the page, it passes
complete to the next.
With inferior ones Only Element section. If the element and their
inferiors not fit on the page, turn the whole to the
next page.
Jump before | Jump after
Applies to Start, Separator , Element, Separator end, End element and Final.
It specify a condition to generate a page break before or after printing the section.
Browse not
All sections except Master page and Search.
It links to the section the contents of the Search section of the indicated number.
Adjustment
It adjusts the contents of the section to the upper or lower limit of the
page. It affects all sections except master page header and footer.
Properties of the Element section
Condition
If its matched, it jumps to the Element section listed in the Element
No. property, leaving unprinted the lower intermediate, if any.
Element n
Section Element which is skipped if the annotated expression is fulfilled in Condition.
Table
Table of the Presto project that is opened with the section.
Key
Key of the table for which the elements are arranged in the section
field.
Mask
It applies to the key field to filter the elements that are printed. If alphanumeric must be quoted and supports wildcards * and ?.
Design report 271

Selection
It lets filtering the elements to be printed by a Presto expression.
Element end
It is printed at the end of the section that closes to print totals or
summaries.
Separator | Separator end
It groups the elements of the section by the first characters of the key,
creating a Separator section and a Separator End one, before and
after the group.
Separator characters
Number of characters of the key by which the elements are grouped
when there are separators. You can use the following special cases:
Value
1
-1
-2
-3

Type
Date
Date
Date
Concept

Groups by
Days
Months
Years
Nature

Order by
Sort criteria, which may be a field in the table, a text box or an expression. The sort by default is by the key field and is not needed to record. Sorting by other criteria may result in slower execution of the
report.
Common properties of controls
The controls move one grid unit at each press of the cursor.
Name
The name of the new controls is formed by the control type and a
number. It can be changed later; must begin with a letter and can also
use numbers and characters $ and _.
You cannot use the reserved names, as the fields of work, function
names and language structures.
Visible
It lets calculating auxiliary variables, which generate a required value
in the report, but not wish to print. The non-visible controls occupy
space on the printed report, unless the condition below is not met.

272 Manual de Presto manual

Condition
If the condition is not met, control is not printed or occupies space.
Text box control properties
Autoextensible
If the text to include does not fit in the rectangle box and the Yes
answer is selected, width control is maintained, but the number of
lines is increased as needed.
Origin
Presto expression indicating what to print in control.
Numerical results are printed with all decimal places, without thousands separators. This result can be formatted using a format to this
same field with the % function, as described in the Expression builder, or with the criteria of the Format field.
Font
Choose type and font size available on the computer.
Number format
Decimal positions
Number of decimal places with which the variable is printed.
Sign +
It adds the + character when the value of the variable is positive.
Thousands separator
It prints the thousands separator, according to the operating system
regional.
Words
It converts a number to its string expression in words in the language
displayed in VIEW: Project settings: Miscellaneous or in Roman numerals.
Gender
Male or female gender of the value in letter of the variable.
Caps
It displays the value in uppercase letter of the variable.
Alphanumerical format
The alphanumeric expressions are printed within the text box:

The maximum allowable width in all predefined variables, except in the texts.
Design report 273

The width corresponding to the real text in the texts.

The corresponding width to the assigned value for userdefined variables.

Delete white space


It removes whitespace characters by the end of the text.
Caps | Mins
It prints this variable in uppercase, lowercase, or as is.
Words
Automatic hyphenation of words.
RTF format
It prints the text as formatted, unchanged, except it takes in account
the state of the hyphenation option.
Date format
A date type variable is internally the number of Julian days or correlative since January 1, 1980. The date format option allows you to convert this number to a date as you want to print it.
Text
It lets you choose a standard format of date in a list.
If another format is desired, we can write a string expression, where
the characters shown in the following table have special meaning:
Format
D, M, Y
DD, MM, YY
DDD, MMM,
YYY
MMMM
Mn
Dr, Mr, Yr
Ym

Description
Day, month or year, figures, omitting zeros by the left.
Day, month or year, in numbers with two digits.
Day, month or year, in letter.
If the language is Catalan, month in letters and preceded
by d when necessary.
Month in letter, with n initial characters.
Day, month or year in roman numerals.
Year in numbers and a thousand separator.

The characters not included in the table are printed unchanged.


For example, the expression:
MMM DD Y
Generates printing:
05 de March of 2003
274 Manual de Presto manual

Alternatively you can use the formatting function of dates:


%(format)f(numeric expression of date)
The term format functions as the aforementioned Text box. For
example:
%(D de MMM de Y)f(today)
Results:
March 5, 2003
Adjustments
Justifying
The General justification aligns the numbers on the right and type
variables and alphanumeric date to the left.
The justification None respects the indented applied to text.
Fill in
Character that will fill the gap between the control box and its contents, if it does not fully occupied.
Calculation
It lets setting variables to perform a calculation on the expression of
the Source property of the text box.
Operation
It calculates the sum, average, maximum or minimum of the control
listed in the Source property of the control. Its used habitually in
End element or Final sections.
Element n
Number of element that will perform the operation.
When printing
When selected the Source option, only do the specified operation if
the element that applies has been really printed. It may happen that
the element has been travelled by the report, but not printed yet, because it does not fit on the page. Thus the correct result of the operation in special sections, such as footer, is obtained.
Select No option for the transaction as soon as the element is
crossed by the report, whether or not printed.
Reset End element
It resets the value of the variable when you run the End element
indicated.

Design report 275

Reset End separator


It resets the variable value when you execute the indicated Separator
End.
Reset page break
It resets the value of the variable when a page break occurs.
Browse not
Section Search on which will perform the operation.
Condition
The calculation is performed only on the concepts that meet this condition.
Line control properties
Inclination
The different possibilities, " | ", "- ", "/ " and "\ ", forcing the orientation of the line.
Page break
It inserts a page break along the line, with different options. You can
include a condition in the corresponding property.
Control Properties Rectangle
Background style
You can choose a visible or invisible background.
Graphic control properties
Origin
Provenance of the chart.
Options
File
Thumbnail
Image
First image
First drawing
Field

Description
Image file in any graphics supported format.
Thumbnail of the associated file.
Graphical representation of the associated file.
First attached file of type image.
First associated file of vectorial type.
Represented by a graph, as natures.

276 Manual de Presto manual

File
Origin = File
Filename with the graph. The graph is stored in the report, so it is not
necessary to retain the original file.
Origin = Field
Presto Name field represented by the graph.
Self adjusting size
If enabled, the control size increases to the size of the graph, moving
the controls or following sections, if necessary. It is useful for reports
with images or drawings associated to the project concepts.
Gantt control properties
It takes into account various conditions of display of the Gantt chart
in that moment in Presto. The following properties, except Header,
are common to the entire report.
Header
Display the time scale of the diagram.
Start date
Date, in the format supported by Presto, from which diagram printing
starts.
mm / time unit
Mm of width assigned to each column of the unit of time.
Helps to adjust the position of the controls
Ruler
Horizontal and vertical rulers in the report design. It allows multiple
selections of elements.
Grid
It displays a grid on the report layout that helps to align the controls.
Report properties X Grid and Y Grid indicates the number of subdivisions per unit grid.
EDIT: Snap to Grid
It sets to grid subdivisions the operations on controls and sections
that affect their position or size, even if the grid is not visible.

Design report 277

Parameters (questions)
List of user-definable questions that are presented to preview, print or
export the report.
Property
Variable

Question

Length
Mys
Answer

Description
Variable that takes the value of the response, with the same
rules as the names of controls.
The type of the variable depends on the content of Answer.
Text of question to ask.
It may be included questions in the program different languages, and each must be separated by ; and in the following order:
Spanish;Catalan;English;French; <Internal> ; Portuguese;
German; <Internal>;Italian;Polish
Maximum number of characters in the response.
Automatic change to caps of the response.
Default value, which also affects the type of the variable.
The alphanumeric responses must be quoted; if you want an
alphanumeric variable with not default value, enter .
If you want a drop down list of alphanumeric responses, enter the options separated by ;.

If there is a text box called Help, its contents are displayed when you
run the report, along with the questions, and in the project language.
Go up the parameter | Go down the parameter
Alter the order of the questions.

TOOLS
Allows selection of a control to create or add content to the layout of
the report. The coordinates of each control can be seen at the bottom
of the window.
Select
Select one or more controls.
Textbox
It creates a control to print a field variable, expression or fixed text.
Line
It creates a control that prints a line.
278 Manual de Presto manual

Rectangle
It creates a control that prints a rectangle.
Image
It creates a control for printing images or associated drawings, or a
separate graphic file.
Gantt
It creates a control to print a bar or a header in a Gantt chart.
Format controls
Turn into subtotal
To create an automatic subtotal create a text box in a suitable section,
such as End element, Separator end, Epilogue and Final. Then,
select Format: convert to subtotal.
Presto displays a list with the numeric controls of the sections that
may be totalized, as Element and Browse. Select the text box you
want to totalize and change the result, as desired.
Copy control format
It converts the chosen control formatting properties in those of the
defect.
Paste format to the control
It applies the default properties of the selected controls.
Align
It aligns the selected controls.
Adjust size
By choosing Adjust to content, if the control is a text box, set the
height to font size; if a graph from a file, set its size.
Bring to front
It locates the selected controls ahead of other overlapping ones.
Bring to back
It locates the selected controls behind the overlapping others.

Design report 279

SECTION
Insert
It insert an Element or Searching section in front of the chosen
section.
Master page
It prints a common background or watermark on all pages of the report, except in the Prologue and Epilogue sections; the content of
the other sections is printed on it.
Prologue
Its printed at the beginning of the report and then a page break is
inserted.
Header
Its contents are printed at the top of each page, except in the pages
of the sections Prologue and Epilogue.
Start
It prints exclusively on the top of the first page of the report.
Element
You can print a record in a table of Presto. For example, a Concepts.Code control, without any conditions, prints a line for each
item of the table, with your code.
The chained of Element sections let printing the information from
successive nested hierarchies of concepts. After each top-level element all lower elements are printed, and so on. You can view an example: Annex I. Technical documentation: Tables.
You can also concatenate Element sections associated to other tables, to print the concepts and their take-off lines, suppliers and their
supplies, invoices and their maturities, etc.
Each element section its possible add sections End element, Separator and End separator.
See Properties of the Element section to see the various ways to
select and sort the elements.
Final
It prints once at the end of the report, to incorporate end comments,
totals or signatures.

280 Manual de Presto manual

Foot
Is printed at the bottom of each page, except in the Prologue and
Epilogue sections.
Epilogue
It is printed at the end of the report on a separate page after the Final section.
Browse
Its associated to a Presto table and links to another section of the
report. It prints once for each record in the selected table and works
similarly to the Element section.
It serves to nest data more flexibility than in the Element sections.
For example, to print invoices with theirs supplies can be used two
Element sections; but if you want to print on each invoice the maturities after the supplies, an Element section is not helpful, as it
seeks the maturities of supplies, that do not exist. To do this, add a
Browse section with the maturities data instead of the third section
Element.
A Browse section is linked to a section of any kind, except to another Browse section, selecting the number in the Browse Number
dropdown list of the properties of the section that is linked. The generated lines by the Browse section is printed after each element in
the section that is linked.
Browse section has the properties Table, Key, Mask, Selection
and Adjustment, which works as the Element section, and Element number, indicating the desired record of the table; if null,
through all the records.
You can open as many Searching sections as desired, but can only
link one per section.
The operations on Searching sections automatically restarted its
value each time is linked to the Search section.

Design report 281

282 Manual de Presto manual

Expression builder
The expressions are used to create user fields, reports, filters and rules
from the values of existing fields.

The expressions are written using C language conventions, except where indicated otherwise.
The decimal separator is always the point.

The left window shows all the fields, sorted by tables with operators
and functions, with examples of its use.
General variables
Variables in the working environment of the user.
Functions
Double-clicking on the name of a function is inserted into the edit
box. Then the formal parameters must be replaced by real ones.
By selecting Functions: Numerics and abs is written:
abs(num)
Select the contents of brackets and choosing a field, eg Concepts.Est, you get:
abs (Concepts.Est)
Operators
To language C standards operators are added some, as the operator
"*?", that lets you quickly if an expression checks a mask, and the exponentiation, "^".
Filters
It lets select predefined filters.
To enable multiple simultaneous filters should be concatenated using
&& (logical and) or | | (logical or).
Fields and expressions
It allows use user columns and other predefined expressions, that are
saved with the Save as option.
Project fields
The list of Presto tables with all fields.
You can also see on Presto Reports, VIEW: Field list option. The
Type column indicates the values supported as answer.

Expression builder 283

Type Variable
Comment
A
Alphanumeric The number indicates the maximum number of
characters.
N
Numeric
Any numerical value.
F
Date
Format DD/MM/YYYY
B
Boolean
0: No 1: Yes
C
Character
One character.
The fields in these tables are identified in expressions using the table
name and field name, separated by point.
Concepts.Description
Fields of work accessible VIEW: Project settings: Data, belong to the
root concept and used by the expression:
Concepts [Nat == 0] .field
The fields of work that are accessible in VIEW: Variables are used
with the prefix Work.
These fields can also be identified with the functions work() and
workd() for alphanumeric and numeric data respectively, which also
allow refer to the general user-created variables.
Example
Work.Period
Work.Tax

Example
workd(Period)
work(Tax)

Result
11
IVA

Fields reports
Report variables
Specific properties of the report, such as the number of the page being printed. It start with an underscore.
Parameters (questions)
Variables that ask the user before running the report.
Text boxes
It lets using the value of other text boxes in the report.
Fields of the table
When opened from a section of a report, only are displayed the most
appropriate fields to the selected information.

284 Manual de Presto manual

Linked variables
You may refer to a field of an item in a table without specifically open,
whenever a field element of the original table is key in the other.
This syntax is used:
Table1[ Key1==Table2.Key2].Variable
For example, CodSup table Relationships key matches the key
code of concepts table. Therefore, for the above summary of the
present concept can be used the expression:
Concepts [Code == Relations.CodSup ] .Abstract
Manual formatting of fields
To display a field as shown in Presto, the prefix % is used.
The result becomes alphanumeric, can therefore not be used as a
numerical expression in other calculated fields.
Other formats
It may apply to other formats with % function, applied to an expression in parentheses, as follows:
'%[Flags][Width[.decimals]]n(expresion)
Flags
Meaning
z
Fill with zeros by the left.
m
Thousands separator.
+
Positive sign, if any (the negative is always printed)
b
Blank for null values, instead of 0.
Width refers to the total number of characters.
Example
'% 10n (1234.567)

Result
1234,567

'% 10.2n (1234.567)

1234,57

'% z10n (1234.567)

001234,567

'% m10n (1234.567)

1.234,567

'% + 10n (1234.567)

+1234,567

'% 10n (0)

'%b10n(0)
The result is alphanumeric

Expression builder 285

286 Manual de Presto manual

Link to Excel and Access


The import format described in Service request web of Presto,
Connecting with other programs: Word and Excel connection section.

Excel
Import
Import an Excel workbook, you must have the same structure and
format as the result of the FILE: Export: Excel.
Export
Generates a spreadsheet in Excel format:
With data from one or two pricing structures.

With different levels of decomposition.


With take-off lines and texts.

The resulting sheet can be modified and import back to Presto, while
its structure is respected.
Features:
Calculated fields contain formulas and highlighted in yellow.

Locked published in red and the value is exported, not the


formula.
Prices in other currencies are converted into the currency of
the work.

The column values of measurements obtained in specific columns, to allow generation of comparative and to facilitate import.

The result of the take-off lines formulas exported as a number,


but the formula is exported as text.

Decomposition concepts cancelled or blocked price, or lines


corresponding to amounts cancelled in any of the pricing
structures to export measurement is not exported.
The tabs are replaced by spaces.

Presto advanced resources, including indirect costs, lengthy texts, or


not supported by Excel as tables within text cells are not supported.

Link to Excel and Access 287

Export Presto windows to Excel


Export layout to Excel
Exports lines or ranges selected from a window table to an Excel
workbook.
The book can have a pre-designed, so that the cells to export are inserted into selected calculation sheet, starting at the top left corner
and replacing the existing content.
If there are expressions in the remaining cells, updated automatically,
also as graphics.
If the worksheet contains a macro called Presto, will run after export.
The leaves to export tables are installed by default in the directory
defined in the environment. This directory is divided into others,
which correspond to the names of windows Presto. When you export
a window, shows the spreadsheets that exist in the directory that has
the same name as that of the window.
Generate Excel books from templates
The templates are in the Reports menu, and can be customized as
indicated in Templates Excel and Word documents.
The format of the templates described in Service request web of
Presto, Connecting with other programs: Word and Excel Connection section.

Access
Import
It imports the information of a work in Access format.
The imported information must appear in tables and fields with the
same names as the corresponding elements of Presto, as are exported
with FILE: Export: Access. Tables and unrecognized by Presto fields
are ignored.
Records of unique key tables as concepts, substitute the equivalent
records of the work of Presto, they already exist. All of the remaining
tables are added.
After importing, FILE: Projects: Check integrity option is executed.
Export
Create an Access database with all the information of the work and its
very structure of tables and columns. It contains computed columns,
which are normally grey.
288 Manual de Presto manual

The exported database can be modified with Access, being responsible for conforming to their coherence and relational integrity. If it is
imported back to Presto, the original work is obtained, with the
changes.
The Description field of design of Access table contains help tracks
of each Presto field.

Link to Excel and Access 289

290 Manual de Presto manual

Appendix I. Technical documentation


This section contains the information that is not essential for the routine use of Presto, but can provide relevant technical details for advanced users, such as:

Directories and files.


User restrictions.

Directories and files


Presto is installed in the chosen directory by the user, and is the Installation directory on the manual sections.
User and temporary directories defined in the operating system are
used.
Win32/64. Program directory
It contains the needed files to run Presto and the auxiliary directories.
File
.EXE
.DLL
Presto.DBE
.CFG
.LOG

Content
Executable programs
Books of the program
Restrictions
Configuration files
File usage auditing

Directory
wcca40soft

It has
Spelling checker files in Catalan.

Location-specific complementary directories


Directory
Projects

Name
Project

Reports and
templates
Reference

Report

It has
Projects and files in various formats for use in
imports, images and drawings.
Reports, Word and Excel templates.

Reference Price tables, purchasing groups database.

Export layout Excel


to Excel

Subdirectories spreadsheets to export to Excel


Presto windows.

Appendix I. Technical documentation 291

Directory
Name
Templates
Template
work and reports
Tutorial
Tutorial

It has
Subdirectories with projects /Presto reports
that are the basis for creating new projects /
reports.
Works for tutorials.

Wizards

Wizard

Plugins

Plugin

Estimated costs, predimensionadores, QMASS,


etc.
Programs or executable files.

Help

Help

Help CHM. files

Data

Data

.LNG files from different program languages,


postal codes of various locations, etc.
Check FILE: Working environment: Directories.

User restrictions
A secure system requires an administrator and a previous security in
the network itself, as well as preparing the individual user settings and
the maintenance needed to adapt the restrictions to the changes required with the time.
The Presto system constraints affect all network users and is activated
by the Activated restrictions option from the dropdown list of FILE:
Working environment: Restrictions option. If options appear disabled
is because there are not enough permissions. The administrator must
have write permission to the Presto setup directory, where a file Presto.DBE is created. Therefore, to maintain the security, any user except
the administrator, must have write permission in that directory.
The administrator can set the user profile he wants, and copy the
Presto.PrestoPerfilXml file in the program directory.
To be operational the system, you must select Activated restrictions
and enter a password.
In workstations
Use restrictions on this computer option is activated computer by
computer. This prevents the user from modifying and customizing
menus layouts contained in his work profile. The profile can be imported from files preconfigured profiles or use defined by the administrator.

292 Manual de Presto manual

This option can be check at any time; however, its not possible uncheck if is enabled the Presto restrictions system, except that the correct password be entered.

Appendix I. Technical documentation 293

You might also like